UNWTOQtr12-IntroBookletAR by S Figueras

. â&#x20AC;Ť Ř§" ŘŞ Ř§â&#x20AC;Ź# â&#x20AC;Ť ŘĽ Ř§ Ř§ ŘĄ Ř§ ŘąŘ§ŘŞ Ů&#x201E; Ř§ ŘŞ Ů&#x2C6; Ř§â&#x20AC;Ź

12 3) â&#x20AC;Ť ŘĽ Ř§â&#x20AC;ŹŘ&#x152; - +â&#x20AC;Ť Ů&#x2C6;Ů&#x201E; ŘŁâ&#x20AC;Ź/â&#x20AC;Ť Ů&#x2C6;â&#x20AC;ŹŘ&#x152; -+).) â&#x20AC;Ť Ů&#x2C6;â&#x20AC;ŹŘ&#x152; â&#x20AC;Ť* Ř§â&#x20AC;Ź+ â&#x20AC;Ť ( ) ŘŞâ&#x20AC;Ź# â&#x20AC;Ť Ů&#x2026; Ů&#x2021;&Ř§ Ř§â&#x20AC;Ź% : 7 â&#x20AC;Ť Ř§â&#x20AC;Ź-"â&#x20AC;Ť Ř§ŘĄâ&#x20AC;Ź/â&#x20AC;Ť * ŘŁâ&#x20AC;ŹŘ&#x152; "6â&#x20AC;Ť Ř§â&#x20AC;Ź4 â&#x20AC;ŤŘąâ&#x20AC;Ź5â&#x20AC;ŤŘ§â&#x20AC;Ź

Global Code of Ethics for Tourism; The Millennium Development Goals; Tourism and the Millennium Development Goals; and Green Economy: A Transformation to Address Multiple Crises Tourism and the Millennium Development Goals.

-# : â&#x20AC;Ť )Ř§â&#x20AC;Ź# #" â&#x20AC;Ť ŘŁŮ&#x2020;â&#x20AC;Ź8%!

< â&#x20AC;Ť Ř§Ř˘â&#x20AC;Ź%!

โ ซ ุฅ ุง ุง ุก ุง ุฑุงุชโ ฌ โ ซ ู ุง ุช ู ุง ุง ุช ุง โ ฌ โ ซ โ ช :โ ฌโ ฌ โ ซโ ช> 18-22โ ฌุฐุงุฑโ ช /โ ฌุฑุณโ ช2012 ุ โ ฌโ ฌ โ ซุฑุค< โ ช 7" 2030 :โ ฌุฏ ุฑุง ุฑุฉ ุง โ ช 1< C *+ #โ ฌุง โ ช #โ ฌุง โ ช D#โ ฌุฏ< โ ช 4 ุ โ ฌุขโ ช

Eโ ฌุง โ ช #โ ฌโ ฌ โ ซุง โ ช + #/โ ฌู ุง )โ ช 2โ ฌู * ุง โ ช #โ ฌุง โ ช D#โ ฌุฏ< ู ุง โ ช . Fโ ฌู ุฅู โ ช :โ ฌุน ุง ุฅ โ ช %โ ฌุช ู โ ช )#โ ฌุตโ ฌ โ ซุง โ ช .4<) #โ ฌู * โ ช Iโ ฌุงโ ช5โ ฌู ุฃู < )ู )ุงโ ช .โ ฌุง ุช ุง ุฑุฉ ู ุง ู ุง โ ช -โ ฌุฑุฉ * ุฃโ ช /โ ฌู โ ช 4.โ ฌู " โ ช& Eโ ฌโ ฌ โ ซ ุช ู ุง โ ช #โ ฌุง" ุช

โ ช #โ ฌุง โ ช J E < )7% +โ ฌุง ุฑุฉ โ ช +โ ฌุง ู ุง โ ช #โ ฌุง โ ช4 ุ โ ฌโ ฌ โ ซุง )ุฏุฉ โ ช + 4Eโ ฌุง โ ช #โ ฌุช ุง โ ช. 7โ ฌโ ฌ โ ซโ ช +โ ฌุง โ ช Dโ ฌุง โ ช ุ โ ฌุง โ ช 7#โ ฌู " โ ช " Lโ ฌุง โ ช Jโ ฌุง โ ช # )7% +โ ฌุงู ู " < โ ช Mโ ฌุง โ ช* 2โ ฌโ ฌ โ ซโ ช +โ ฌุฅุฏุงุฑุงุช ุง ุง )โ ช Cโ ฌู ุง ู ุง โ ช ุ 7โ ฌู โ ช Mโ ฌู * ู ุงโ ช .โ ฌุง ุช ู ุง < <*โ ช - M < ุ โ ฌโ ฌ โ ซโ ช +โ ฌุง ู โ ช # N< 7#โ ฌุฑ โ ช -โ ฌู โ ช -โ ฌุฑุง"โ ช -โ ฌู ุง ุช ู ุง โ ช #โ ฌุง" ุช ุง โ ช + ุ โ ฌุฃู โ ฌ โ ซู &โ ช Lโ ฌู ุง โ ช 7โ ฌู ุง โ ช 2โ ฌุง &ู < )ุฑ โ ช : " #โ ฌุน ุง โ ช E .โ ฌุง ุฎ ุง โ ช D#โ ฌุฏู ุง โ ฌ โ ซุง ุงู *โ ช ุ โ ฌู โ ช 4โ ฌุง โ ช #โ ฌุงุจ ุฑ<) โ ช <R ุ 20 +โ ฌุงู โ ช ุ 2012 ุ ) %)</โ ฌุงุฒ< โ ชR# < T" 3 ุ โ ฌุง< โ ช +โ ฌโ ฌ โ ซุง ุช ุง โ ช - " #โ ฌุง โ ช #%โ ฌู โ ช )7%โ ฌุง โ ช D#โ ฌุฏ ุฃโ ช ุ UVโ ฌู ุง ) ุง โ ช D#โ ฌุฏู โ ช ุ โ ฌู ุง โ ช W #โ ฌุง โ ช ุ + #/โ ฌู < ุง โ ชุ Fโ ฌโ ฌ โ ซู ุง โ ช X#โ ฌุงู ุง โ ช #โ ฌุงู ู ุง โ ช) YDโ ฌุงุฑุฏโ ช ุ โ ฌู ุฅ< ุฏ ุต ุง โ ช : 12Zโ ฌุน ุง โ ช .โ ฌู ู &ุง ุง ู โ ชุ โ ฌโ ฌ โ ซ<)ุงโ ช \/โ ฌู ุงโ ช ) .โ ฌุง ุช ู ุง โ ช) 2โ ฌู โ ช +โ ฌุฅุฏุงุฑุงุช ุง ุง )โ ช Cโ ฌุฃ โ ช Fโ ฌุข โ ช: "6โ ฌโ ฌ โ ซโ ช -1โ ฌู ุงโ ช5โ ฌุฏู ุงุช ุง ] < ุฏ ุขโ ช J " Rโ ฌุ โ ฌ โ ซโ ช -2โ ฌู ุง ุช ู ุง โ ช #โ ฌุง" ุช ุง โ ช& E " * < #โ ฌู * ุฃโ ช : " /โ ฌุน ุง โ ช)7% +โ ฌโ ฌ โ ซ โ ช #โ ฌุงู ุ โ ฌ โ ซโ ช -3โ ฌุข โ ช 36 * < Yโ ฌุฑ ุง โ ช #โ ฌุง ุฃู " ุณ โ ช Tโ ฌู โ ช ุ โ ฌู ู โ ช ุ # ุ โ ฌุง ุช ุง โ ช 7 7D#โ ฌโ ฌ โ ซุง โ ช * < #โ ฌุงโ ช #+โ ฌุฏู ุ โ ฌ โ ซโ ช -4โ ฌู ุง โ ช Jโ ฌุง โ ช T" #โ ฌุฅ ุงุฏุงุช ุง ุง โ ช #โ ฌุ โ ฌ โ ซโ ช -5โ ฌู < * ุง โ ช)-โ ฌุถ )ุฏุฉ * ุฃโ ช) /โ ฌุบ โ ช <)#โ ฌุช ุฃโ ช . +โ ฌุง โ ช* -#โ ฌุ ู ุข โ ช* < Yโ ฌโ ฌ โ ซ"โ ช 1 7โ ฌุฐ โ ชaโ ฌุ โ ฌ โ ซโ ช -6โ ฌู โ ชRโ ฌุง< โ ช %โ ฌุง โ ช #โ ฌุ ู ุข โ ช * < Yโ ฌุฃู โ ช <R%โ ฌุง ุง โ ช " # Uโ ฌุง ุ โ ฌ โ ซโ ช -7โ ฌู " โ ช #โ ฌู &โ ชW Lโ ฌู ุง ุฑุงุก ุง โ ชb * ) 7โ ฌุ ู ุง ู ุฑ ุง &ู < * โ ช :โ ฌุน ุง โ ช Xโ ฌุต ุฃู โ ฌ โ ซ< โ ช \ cโ ฌุฃู <โ ชWโ ฌุฏ<\ุ โ ฌ โ ซโ ช -8โ ฌู ุงโ ช %โ ฌุช ุง ุช ุง ุง โ ช #โ ฌุง โ ช" +โ ฌุง โ ช D#โ ฌุฏุงุช ุง โ ช UXโ ฌุงุก" ุง โ ช) " #โ ฌู โ ฌ โ ซ <โ ช : " -โ ฌุน ุฃโ ช 12d + J )< " UVโ ฌู ุฃโ ช # UVโ ฌุช ุง โ ช 7โ ฌุ โ ฌ โ ซ โ ช *+ /eโ ฌู &โ ช Lโ ฌุงโ ช " ุ F 5โ ฌุฅโ ช +โ ฌุงุฏ ุง ู &โ ช )7% + 4 " Lโ ฌู * ุฏุฑุง ุง โ ช Jโ ฌโ ฌ โ ซุง โ ช )-Eโ ฌุง โ ช T" #โ ฌุง โ ช +โ ฌุฉ ุง )ู < โ ช E#โ ฌู โ ช 7#โ ฌุฏุฆ ุง โ ช #โ ฌุง ู "โ ช ุ -โ ฌู * ุฑุค< โ ฌ โ ซโ ช +โ ฌู "โ ช - * < d :โ ฌุฃู "โ ช g #โ ฌุฅโ ช h 4 dโ ฌุฏู โ ช h - DDX#โ ฌุง ุง โ ฌ โ ซ * โ ช ) %โ ฌู " โ ช.โ ฌโ ฌ

โ ซุง โ ช)-โ ฌุฑ ุง โ ช -#โ ฌู โ ฌ

โ ซ ุง )โ ช % D -/โ ฌุง ุงุฑ ุฅุฏุงุฑุงุช ุง ุง )โ ช Cโ ฌุฐู ู ุง โ ช ZDโ ฌุช โ ช M Jโ ฌู " โ ช& Eโ ฌโ ฌ โ ซโ ช b:Vโ ฌู ุช ุง โ ช #โ ฌุง โ ช #โ ฌุง" โ ช :โ ฌุน ุง โ ช.โ ฌโ ฌ

โ ซุงโ ช5โ ฌู ุงู โ ฌ โ ซ )ู " )ู ุง โ ช hโ ฌุง ุช ุง โ ช ุ โ ฌู ุง โ ช 7#โ ฌุงุซ โ ช # b:Vโ ฌุง โ ช ุ โ ฌู ุงโ ช 6โ ฌุชโ ฌ โ ซุง โ ช %)%โ ฌู ุข โ ช - :" Eโ ฌุฃ ุข* โ ช) E #Xโ ฌู ุง โ ช .โ ฌู )ู " ุขโ ช ]" 2 + Rโ ฌู โ ช .โ ฌู ุฑุฉโ ฌ โ ซุง โ ช 7โ ฌุต โ ช +โ ฌุง โ ช +โ ฌุฉ ุง ] ] โ ช #โ ฌุง ุง โ ช #โ ฌุง )ุฃู ุง โ ช D#โ ฌุฏ< ู ุง โ ช + #/โ ฌู ุง โ ช ุ ( Fโ ฌโ ฌ โ ซุฐ โ ช " aโ ฌุงโ ช 36โ ฌุฑ ู ุง โ ช *+ #โ ฌุฐ โ ช aโ ฌุง ุงุฑุงุช ุฐุงุช ุง โ ช Dโ ฌุช ู ุง โ ช #โ ฌู ุง โ ช b :X#โ ฌุง โ ช #โ ฌโ ฌ โ ซ"โ ช) &X#โ ฌุง โ ช . E #X Yโ ฌู ุฅุฐ < ู ุฐ โ ชk ุ aโ ฌู ุง "โ ช l #โ ฌุฃ<โ ช - Uโ ฌุง โ ช Zโ ฌุช ู ุง โ ชZ+ E#โ ฌุช *โ ฌ โ ซุง โ ช :โ ฌุน ุง ู ู ุง โ ช :โ ฌุน ุง โ ช Xโ ฌุต ุง ุง โ ช ุ 2 %โ ฌุข " ู )โ ช c] dโ ฌุงุช ู ุง โ ช Tโ ฌุข ุง โ ช #โ ฌโ ฌ โ ซ" โ ช #โ ฌุถ ุง โ ชWโ ฌู * โ ช *+โ ฌุง โ ช .โ ฌู " โ ช):โ ฌู ุง ุฃ<โ ช E + Uโ ฌู ุง ุง โ ช #โ ฌุง ุง )

โ ฌ โ ซโ ช ุ +โ ฌู ุฏุฆ ุง ู โ ช %โ ฌุง โ ช6โ ฌุฏุงุจ ุง โ ช ุ โ ฌู ุฃู ุงู ุงโ ช 5โ ฌุง โ ช 7#โ ฌุฉ ุง โ ช. E m 2 %โ ฌโ ฌ โ ซู โ ชk ุ #โ ฌู ุง โ ช * < cโ ฌู &ุง ุง โ ช Tโ ฌุท ุก ุง ุฑุงุช ู ุฃู "โ ช #โ ฌุญ โ ช Tโ ฌุฑุข * ุง ู ุง โ ช -โ ฌุฑุงุช ู ุงโ ช5โ ฌุฏู ุงุชโ ฌ โ ซู โ ช E7โ ฌุง ุด ู ุง โ ช E#โ ฌุง โ ช b :X#โ ฌู ุง โ ช #โ ฌุง ู ุฃ ุฏ ุง ุช ุฐุงุช ุง โ ช. Dโ ฌโ ฌ

โ ซุง โ ช -โ ฌู ุง โ ช -โ ฌโ ฌ โ ซุง โ ช -โ ฌุง โ ช โ < hโ ฌุง ุง โ ช T 7" #โ ฌุฑุข * ุง โ ช #โ ฌุฑุจ ุง โ ช 1 :#โ ฌู โ ชR -โ ฌุฃุฉโ ช .โ ฌู <โ ช Tโ ฌโ ฌ โ ซุข โ ชR#โ ฌุฃ โ ช + -โ ฌู โ ช .โ ฌู โ ช Tโ ฌุช ู โ ช qโ ฌุงุช ู ุฃโ ช 4 ุ + / d +โ ฌุฏุฑุง ุช โ ชd 7โ ฌุช ู ุฃโ ช. + :T%โ ฌโ ฌ โ ซู ุง ู ุถโ ช + ุ โ ฌุง โ ช * Mโ ฌุข)โ ช < h% -%โ ฌุฅโ ช ุ d /โ ฌู โ ช +โ ฌู ุถ โ ช D#Xโ ฌุฉโ ช E + 2 ุ โ ฌู โ ช C T#" ุ โ ฌโ ฌ โ ซุงโ ช5โ ฌุฏู ุงุชโ ช ุ โ ฌู ู "โ ช + Eโ ฌุฑ ุง ู ู "โ ช T Tโ ฌุช ู โ ช qโ ฌุงุชโ ช.โ ฌโ ฌ โ ซู < ุง โ ช Tโ ฌุท ุง ุฅ ู โ ช 4.โ ฌโ ฌ โ ซ โ ช .โ ฌู <โ ช Tโ ฌู &ุง ุง โ ช Tโ ฌุท " ุฑ<*โ ฌ โ ซโ ช).) Jโ ฌุน ุง โ ช .โ ฌู โ ชZVโ ฌู โ ฌ โ ซู ุฅโ ช /โ ฌุงุก ุง โ ชZโ ฌุชโ ช ุ โ ฌู โ ช 4 /โ ฌุง ) ุชโ ชุ โ ฌโ ฌ

โ ซ" ุง โ ชZCโ ฌุน โ ช) U * \ +โ ฌู ู ุฃุฏู ุงุช โ ชZVโ ฌู ุง ุฅโ ช Cโ ฌุฑโ ฌ โ ซโ ช ุ ( )<) +โ ฌู โ ช Tโ ฌุช โ ช ุ + /โ ฌู ุฒ< ุฑุฉ " ู ุฐู โ ฌ โ ซู &โ ช Lโ ฌุง ุง ุงโ ช + (/)#< ุ %โ ฌุง โ ช Tโ ฌุฑุข * ุง ู ุงโ ชุ %โ ฌโ ฌ โ ซู โ ช Mโ ฌุฐ โ ช * aโ ฌุฃโ ช 4 + E" :T%โ ฌุง โ ช 4 #โ ฌุง โ ช. 7โ ฌโ ฌ

โ ซู <โ ช * 4 )#โ ฌุง โ ช Tโ ฌุฑุข * ุฃู < )ุง โ ช * . + *+ < dโ ฌุฑโ ช :* 2โ ฌุงโ ช5โ ฌู ู )ู โ ช r2 #%โ ฌุง ุง ุงโ ชุ %โ ฌโ ฌ โ ซู ุง ุถ ุง โ ช) 2 -โ ฌู ุง โ ช -โ ฌุง โ ช 2โ ฌุง โ ช) ) :โ ฌุง โ ช * < #โ ฌุฃู " )ู โ ช ุ โ ฌุฑุงโ ช ุ โ ฌุฃู โ ช.(... ุ :Vโ ฌโ ฌ โ ซุฅโ ช .โ ฌุฅ ุฐ โ ช ุ aโ ฌู โ ช cโ ฌุง ุฏุฉ * ู &ุง ุง ุกโ ช #< ุ โ ฌุง โ ช Tโ ฌุฑุข)ู ) * <โ ช #โ ฌุงโ ช #Vโ ฌุฑู ( ุขโ ช < " #โ ฌโ ฌ โ ซ<โ ช)T * U#โ ฌุฑุงุช โ ช hโ ฌุง ุง โ ช ุ โ ฌุฃู โ ชdโ ฌุชโ ช ุ โ ฌุฃู โ ช Mโ ฌุฐ โ ช) * aโ ฌุงุฏ ุง โ ช ุ :โ ฌุถ ุง โ ช < Uโ ฌโ ฌ โ ซู ุง โ ช Eโ ฌู ุงโ ช 5โ ฌุง โ ชZโ ฌุฒ โ ช 7โ ฌุง โ ช ุ โ ฌู ุง โ ช) " #โ ฌู โ ช + ) :โ ฌุงุฏ ุง โ ช/โ ฌุง ู ุถ )ู โ ฌ โ ซุง )โ ช).โ ฌุนโ ช.โ ฌโ ฌ โ ซุง โ ช * Dโ ฌู &ุง ุง โ ช % โ r-โ ฌู ุง โ ช X#โ ฌุงู ุฃุฏู ุงุช โ ช ุ E #Xโ ฌู โ ช Vโ ฌุฉ ุง โ ช Xโ ฌุงุก ู ุง โ ช Tโ ฌุฑุข *โ ช ุ โ ฌู โ ช 7โ ฌุง ุดโ ชุ โ ฌโ ฌ โ ซู ุง ุง โ ช +โ ฌุง โ ู ) ุฃู <โ ช -Eโ ฌุง โ ช Tโ ฌุฑุข)ู ุข )ุงโ ช 4 .โ ฌุง โ ช.โ ฌโ ฌ

โ ซุง โ ช) Uโ ฌู โ ฌ โ ซโ ช-1โ ฌโ ฌ

โ ซ ุฏุฆ ุช ุง ุง โ ช #โ ฌุง ู ุง โ ช #โ ฌุง" "โ ช -โ ฌโ ฌ โ ซโ ช1.1โ ฌโ ฌ

โ ซโ ช %โ ฌุฐุฌ ุง โ ช b :X#โ ฌู โ ช\" < h%โ ฌโ ฌ

โ ซโ ช1.2โ ฌโ ฌ

โ ซโ ช %โ ฌุฐุฌ ุง โ ช #โ ฌู โ ช -" < h%โ ฌโ ฌ

โ ซโ ช1.3โ ฌโ ฌ

โ ซุง ุช ุง ู โ ช M Jโ ฌุง ุชโ ฌ

โ ซโ ช1.4โ ฌโ ฌ

โ ซุฏู ุฑ ุง โ ช :โ ฌุน ุง ู ุง โ ช b :X#โ ฌู ุง โ ช #โ ฌโ ฌ

โ ซโ ช1.5โ ฌโ ฌ

โ ซุฏู ุฑ ุง โ ช :โ ฌุน ุง โ ช Xโ ฌุตโ ฌ

โ ซโ ช1.6โ ฌโ ฌ

โ ซุง โ ช b :X#โ ฌุง โ ช #โ ฌุง" โ ฌ

โ ซโ ช 1.7โ ฌุง โ ช b :X#โ ฌุฒ * ุงโ ช %โ ฌุงู ุง *โ ฌ

โ ซโ ช-2โ ฌโ ฌ

โ ซโ ช-3โ ฌโ ฌ

โ ซุง ุถ ู ุง โ ช + ( :โ ฌุง โ ช #โ ฌุง โ ช Jโ ฌุง โ ฌ โ ซโ ช2-1โ ฌโ ฌ

โ ซโ ช J +โ ฌุฃ ุง ุงุฏ ุง โ ฌ

โ ซโ ช2-2โ ฌโ ฌ

โ ซุง โ ช ุ L J + :r#โ ฌุฏ< ) โ ช ุ \#โ ฌู \โ ฌ

โ ซโ ช2-3โ ฌโ ฌ

โ ซุง โ ช #โ ฌู ุง )ุฏุฉ ุง โ ฌ

โ ซโ ช2-4โ ฌโ ฌ

โ ซุง โ ช + ( :โ ฌุง โ ฌ

โ ซโ ช2-5โ ฌโ ฌ

โ ซุงโ ช) 5โ ฌุงู ู ุง โ ช #โ ฌุง" "โ ช -โ ฌโ ฌ

โ ซโ ช2-6โ ฌโ ฌ

โ ซุง โ ช #โ ฌุขโ ช Rโ ฌุง โ ช #โ ฌุง" ุฃ )ุงู ุฐุงุช ุฑุฉ โ ช + 2โ ฌุง โ ฌ

โ ซโ ช2-7โ ฌโ ฌ

โ ซุง โ ช Tโ ฌุงุข ุช * ุง โ ช :โ ฌุน ุง ู ู ุง โ ช :โ ฌุน ุง โ ช Xโ ฌุตโ ฌ

โ ซ>โ ช 3โ ฌุฑ ุง โ ฌ โ ซโ ช3-1โ ฌโ ฌ

โ ซุง โ ช D#โ ฌุฏ ุงโ ช UV5โ ฌู ุฑ<) โ ช20 +โ ฌโ ฌ

โ ซโ ช3-2โ ฌโ ฌ

โ ซุงโ ช 36โ ฌุฑ ุง โ ช D#โ ฌุฏ< โ ช -E< " :โ ฌู โ ช -โ ฌโ ฌ

โ ซโ ช3-3โ ฌโ ฌ

โ ซุงโ ช 36โ ฌุฑ ุง โ ช + #/โ ฌู ุง ] โ ฌ

โ ซโ ช3-4โ ฌโ ฌ

โ ซุงโ ช 36โ ฌุฑ ุง โ ช -E< " : Fโ ฌู โ ช -โ ฌโ ฌ

โ ซุฒ< ุฑุฉ " โ ฌ โ ซุง โ ช <Rโ ฌุฑุฉ ุง โ ช) #โ ฌู " ู ุง )ู ุง ] โ ช * < 4 ) Nโ ฌุฃู < )ู ] "โ ช < + <)Dโ ฌุชโ ฌ โ ซ ุง โ ช ุ โ ฌู )ู <โ ช #โ ฌุฅโ ช +โ ฌุงุฏ ุง โ ช <Rโ ฌุฑุฉ โ ช h 4 1 #โ ฌุช ุง ุง )โ ช Cโ ฌู ุง โ ช . 7โ ฌู โ ช 4 )#< dโ ฌุฃู โ ฌ โ ซ< ุง ) โ ช ) 4โ ฌุฉ ุฃู < ุฐุงุช ุฅ โ ช %โ ฌุช ( ุฃุข] * โ ช *+ +โ ฌุง < ุง โ ช - h " #โ ฌโ ฌ โ ซุง โ ช.โ ฌโ ฌ โ ซู โ ชZVโ ฌู ู &โ ช Lโ ฌุง ุง ุงโ ช + (/)#< ุ %โ ฌุง โ ช Tโ ฌุฑุข * ุง ู ุงโ ช ุ %โ ฌู ุฅโ ช /โ ฌุงุก ุง โ ชZโ ฌุชโ ช ุ โ ฌู โ ช4 /โ ฌโ ฌ โ ซุง ) ุชโ ช ุ โ ฌู โ ช Mโ ฌุฐ โ ช * aโ ฌุฃโ ช 4 + E" :T%โ ฌุง โ ช 4 #โ ฌุง โ ช . 7โ ฌู <โ ช - 4 )#โ ฌุฃ<โ ช Uโ ฌุฃู < )ุง โ ช < dโ ฌโ ฌ

โ ซโ ช * . + *+โ ฌุฑโ ช :* 2โ ฌุงโ ช5โ ฌู ู โ ช ุ โ ฌุง )ู ุง ุง โ ช) ุ 4โ ฌู โ ช r2 #%โ ฌุง ุง ุงโ ช %โ ฌุ ู ุง ุถ ุง โ ช ุ 2 -โ ฌุง )ู โ ฌ โ ซุง โ ช) ุ u Xโ ฌู ุง โ ช -โ ฌุง โ ช. 2โ ฌโ ฌ โ ซู )ู < ุง โ ช Tโ ฌุฑุข)ู ุฅ )โ ช +โ ฌุช โ ช % #โ ฌู โ ช 8 * +) #โ ฌุฅ โ ช) # . DXg 15โ ฌู ุข )โ ช +โ ฌโ ฌ โ ซ โ ช <Rโ ฌุฑุฉ โ ชR/โ ฌุก โ ช * Y #Xโ ฌุง ) โ ช " Y #X ุ 4โ ฌุข โ ช Rโ ฌุข )โ ช *+ +โ ฌุงโ ช V5โ ฌู โ ช.โ ฌโ ฌ โ ซู โ ช <R U7#โ ฌุฑุฉ ุง โ ช #โ ฌุง ุฉโ ฌ โ ซ< โ ช X cโ ฌุงุก ู )โ ชu " Eqโ ฌโ ฌ โ ซุง โ ช -โ ฌุช ุง โ ช + Eโ ฌุง ุง โ ช 2โ ฌโ ฌ โ ซู โ ช <Rโ ฌุฑุฉ ุข ุง )ุงุฐุจ ู ุง โ ช Xโ ฌุชโ ฌ

โ ซ )ู ุง ] โ ช Nโ ฌู ุงโ ช :T%5โ ฌุง โ ช #โ ฌุฐุงุช ุง โ ช 4 ) Dโ ฌุง โ ชุ โ ฌโ ฌ โ ซุฃู <โ ช) Dโ ฌุง โ ช 4โ ฌุง< ู * ุก ุง โ ช ุ โ ฌู ุฐ โ ช * aโ ฌุฃโ ช /โ ฌุก ู โ ฌ โ ซ ุง ) โ ช) 4โ ฌุง โ ช + :โ ฌุช ุง โ ช ุ โ ฌู ุง โ ช ุ J Xโ ฌู ุง ] ] โ ช ุ โ ฌู ุงโ ช5โ ฌุข ุฏ< (โ ชุ โ ฌโ ฌ โ ซู ุง )ุงุฑุฏ ุง โ ช ...โ ฌู ุง ) โ ช)D 4โ ฌุฑุฉ โ ช. +โ ฌโ ฌ

โ ซโ ช Vโ ฌุงู ุฏู ู โ ฌ โ ซุฃุฏ ุณ ู < ุฉ ุง โ ช)7โ ฌุซ ู ุง โ ช T#โ ฌุฑุงุช )โ ช +โ ฌุง ุฉโ ช ุ โ ฌุฃุข ุฏ< ุง ุฑุงุช โ ชeโ ฌุฏุงุฑุฉโ ฌ โ ซุง โ ช Eโ ฌุฏ โ ช ุ โ ฌุง ุฑุงุช ุง ุง โ ช 7#โ ฌุฉโ ช .โ ฌุขโ ช)#โ ฌุฑุฉ โ ช Eโ ฌุณ โ ช Vโ ฌุฉ < ุฉ ุง โ ช b :X#โ ฌู ุง โ ช #โ ฌุง โ ชุ โ ฌโ ฌ โ ซู ุง ุช ุง โ ช ุ โ ฌู ุง ุง โ ช #โ ฌุง โ ช ุ โ ฌู ุง โ ช #โ ฌุง โ ช ุ โ ฌู " ุง )ุงุฑุฏ ุง โ ช +) < Tโ ฌุง โ ช)#โ ฌู โ ฌ โ ซุง โ ช ุ ( Tโ ฌุง โ ช Tโ ฌู ุงโ ช5โ ฌู โ ช bโ ฌู โ ช gโ ฌู ุฃ < โ ช ุ โ ฌู ุฃู ุฑู ู ุง ุฑ< ู > โ ช .โ ฌู "โ ช #โ ฌู ู ุฃุฏ<โ ช h 4 wโ ฌโ ฌ โ ซุง ุง ู โ ช u " W 4โ ฌุง โ ช + & ุ h #โ ฌู โ ช ุ 1998โ ฌู ุฐ โ ช 3 7# -#ED aโ ฌู โ ช . 7โ ฌุฉโ ฌ โ ซู โ ช T#โ ฌุฑุฉ )ู โ ช E2 Cโ ฌู ุง * ุง โ ช Tโ ฌุฑ<โ ช 4โ ฌู ุง ุฏุฑุงุชโ ช.โ ฌโ ฌ

โ ซุฃ ุง ุฏู ู ) โ ช T#โ ฌุฑ )ุฒ< ุง โ ช)- /โ ฌุฑ< โ ช Dโ ฌุง โ ช .โ ฌู \ " ู ุง โ ฌ โ ซ โ ชdโ ฌุช ุง โ ช #โ ฌู <โ ช rโ ฌุง โ ช ุ โ ฌู ุง โ ช hโ ฌุช ุง )ุง ุง โ ช :โ ฌุช ุง โ ช โ -โ ฌุง โ ช uโ ฌุง (โ ช ุ โ ฌู ุง โ ชb :X#โ ฌโ ฌ โ ซุง โ ช - /)#โ ฌุง โ ช #โ ฌุง" โ ช ุ โ ฌู " ุงโ ช5โ ฌุฒ ุช ุง )ุฅ"โ ชd Dโ ฌุช โ ุฅโ ช %โ ฌุด(โ ช)D ุ โ ฌุฑุฉ ุฑโ ช 2โ ฌโ ฌ โ ซุง โ ช Tโ ฌู ุงโ ช5โ ฌู โ ช bโ ฌู โ ช gโ ฌู ุฃ < โ ช .โ ฌู " ู ู ุฃ โ ช ุ โ ฌุข โ ช 7#โ ฌุซ ู โ ช Vโ ฌู โ ช T#โ ฌุฑ ู ุฑโ ช h 4 ุ u 2โ ฌุง โ ฌ โ ซุง ู ุฏู ุฑุง"โ ช -โ ฌุง โ ช #โ ฌุฑ< ) ุงุขโ ช) #โ ฌู ( )ู ุง "โ ชd Dโ ฌุช ุฃโ ช 3โ ฌุก ุงโ ช5โ ฌุฒ ุช )โ ช ุ (2011 ุ C % Mโ ฌู โ ช :Vโ ฌโ ฌ โ ซ โ ช 1<) #โ ฌุง )โ ช Cโ ฌุง โ ช ุ (2009 ุ uโ ฌู โ ช hโ ฌุง ุง โ ช \ /)#โ ฌุง < โ ช uโ ฌุง < ุฉโ ฌ โ ซ โ ช Y D#โ ฌุง โ ช Eโ ฌุฏู )โ ช 2009โ ฌุฅ ุงโ ช6โ ฌู (โ ช ุ โ ฌู โ ช h "Wโ ฌุง ุง )ู ุฅโ ช %โ ฌุด ุง ู )ุงโ ช -/โ ฌโ ฌ โ ซุงโ ช5โ ฌุฒ ุช )"โ ช c Tโ ฌู โ ช ุ (2008 ุ โ ฌู โ ช h "Wโ ฌุง ุง )ู ุง ุง < )โ ชุ (2006 ุ ) %โ ฌโ ฌ โ ซู โ ช %โ ฌู ุฉ โ ช hโ ฌุง ุง )ู ุง ุฒุฏ ู ) ุฑ< โ ช ุ (2005 ุ โ ฌู โ ช 2โ ฌุฉ โ ช hโ ฌุง ุง โ ฌ โ ซุง โ ช < #โ ฌุฉ )ู " ุงโ ช5โ ฌุฒ ุช )ุฏุงุข ุฑโ ช ุ (2005 ุ โ ฌู โ ช %โ ฌู ุฉ โ ช hโ ฌุง ุง )ู "โ ช cโ ฌุฃุฏุงุก ุงโ ช) 5โ ฌุงู โ ฌ โ ซ) *โ ช.(2003 ุ โ ฌโ ฌ

โ ซ ุง โ ฌ โ ซุง ู โ ช1โ ฌโ ฌ

โ ซุง ู โ ช3โ ฌโ ฌ

โ ซุง ู โ ช2โ ฌโ ฌ

โ ซุง ู โ ช5โ ฌโ ฌ

โ ซุง ู โ ช4โ ฌโ ฌ

โ ซโ ช8ุ 30 โ 8ุ 00โ ฌโ ฌ

โ ซโ ช9ุ 15 โ 8ุ 00โ ฌโ ฌ

โ ซุฒ" ุฑุฉ โ ช $โ ฌโ ฌ

โ ซโ ช9ุ 15 โ 8ุ 00โ ฌโ ฌ

โ ซุฅ ุญโ ฌ

โ ซุง โ ช Cโ ฌุง โ ช /โ ฌู โ ช % %โ ฌโ ฌ โ ซุงโ ช# 8โ ฌุงุฏุงุชโ ฌ

โ ซโ ช# & 0โ ฌุง โ ช/โ ฌโ ฌ

โ ซุง โ ช * +โ ฌุงโ ช 8โ ฌุง ?โ ช/โ ฌโ ฌ โ ซ โ ช %โ ฌู ุง โ ช/ * +โ ฌโ ฌ โ ซุฒ โ ช 1โ ฌุง โ ช Oโ ฌู โ ฌ

โ ซุงโ ช 45โ ฌุฑ ุงโ ช 6 78โ ฌุฏ" โ ฌ โ ซู ุงโ ช 0 98โ ฌู ุง โ ช $:โ ฌโ ฌ โ ซู ุง < ; โ ช) %โ ฌุง ?>ุกโ ฌ โ ซโ ช (2โ ฌู ุท โ ช/% 0โ ฌโ ฌ

โ ซโ ช8ุ 50 โ 8ุ 30โ ฌโ ฌ โ ซ ุฑุฉ ุฑ โ ฌ โ ซโ ช9ุ 15 โ 8ุ 50โ ฌโ ฌ โ ซุฏู ุฑ ู ุฃ โ ฌ โ ซุง ุง ู โ ฌ โ ซ โ ช /โ ฌุง โ ฌ โ ซุง โ ฌ โ ซโ ช9ุ 30 โ 9ุ 15โ ฌโ ฌ โ ซุฅ ุง โ ฌ

โ ซโ ช8ุ 00 โ 7ุ 30โ ฌโ ฌ โ ซโ ช9ุ 30 โ 9ุ 15โ ฌโ ฌ โ ซุฅ ุง โ ฌ

โ ซุฅ ุง โ ฌ โ ซโ ช11ุ 45 โ 9ุ 30โ ฌโ ฌ โ ซุง ู ุง ? ุฏุฉ โ ช/โ ฌโ ฌ โ ซุง ู ุง โ ชE%0 D%โ ฌโ ฌ โ ซุง ู ุท โ ช/% 0โ ฌโ ฌ

โ ซ โ ช $% !"#$โ ฌุง &โ ฌ โ ซโ ช11ุ 45 โ 10ุ 00โ ฌโ ฌ

โ ซุฅ ุง โ ฌ

โ ซ ุฐุฌ ู " ุช ุง โ ช* +โ ฌโ ฌ โ ซู ุง ู ุง ุช ุง โ ฌ โ ซู ู โ ช ,-โ ฌุง ุช ู ุทโ ฌ โ ซโ ช/% 0โ ฌโ ฌ

โ ซโ ช12ุ 30 โ 12ุ 00โ ฌโ ฌ โ ซุง ุช ู ุงโ ช 8โ ฌุง ? ุชโ ฌ โ ซุง โ ช 7 /โ ฌู ุฒ" ุฑุฉโ ฌ โ ซโ ช % 0โ ฌุงโ ช,7โ ฌโ ฌ

โ ซุฅ ุง โ ฌ

โ ซุฏู ุฑ ุง โ ช 1 0 $โ ฌุง ู โ ฌ โ ซู ุง โ ช +โ ฌุต โ ช /โ ฌุง โ ช* +โ ฌโ ฌ โ ซุง โ ช /โ ฌู ุงโ ช 45โ ฌุฑ ุงโ ช 6 78โ ฌุฏ" โ ฌ โ ซู ุงโ ช 0 98โ ฌู ุง โ ช $:โ ฌโ ฌ โ ซู ุง < ; โ ช) %โ ฌุง ?>ุกโ ฌ โ ซโ ช (1โ ฌู ุท โ ช/% 0โ ฌโ ฌ โ ซโ ช15ุ 00โ ฌโ ฌ โ ซ@โ ช#โ ฌุงุก <โ ช AB /โ ฌุฅุฏุงุฑุฉโ ฌ โ ซุง ุง โ ช " $โ ฌโ ฌ

โ ซโ ช11ุ 45 โ 9ุ 30โ ฌโ ฌ โ ซโ ช 0โ ฌู ุถ โ ชCJ 0 9โ ฌโ ฌ โ ซุง & ุง โ ช#โ ฌุง โ ช/โ ฌโ ฌ

โ ซโ ช13ุ 30โ ฌโ ฌ โ ซโ ช12ุ 00 โ 11ุ 45โ ฌโ ฌ

โ ซโ ช15ุ 00 โ 12ุ 00โ ฌโ ฌ

โ ซโ ช# & 0โ ฌุง โ ช /โ ฌู โ ช& 0โ ฌโ ฌ โ ซ โ ช 0 ? /โ ฌุชโ ฌ

โ ซ@โ ช#โ ฌุงุก โ ช! /โ ฌโ ฌ โ ซโ ช ABโ ฌุฅุฏุงุฑุฉ ุง โ ฌ โ ซุง โ ช # B " $โ ฌุง >" ุฑุฉโ ฌ โ ซุง โ ช $โ ฌโ ฌ

โ ซโ ช9ุ 30 โ 9ุ 15โ ฌโ ฌ โ ซุฅ ุง โ ฌ

โ ซโ ช13ุ 00 โ 9ุ 30โ ฌโ ฌ

โ ซโ ช10ุ 00 โ 9ุ 30โ ฌโ ฌ

โ ซโ ช12ุ 00 โ 11ุ 45โ ฌโ ฌ

โ ซุง โ ช Mโ ฌุฏุฑุฉ โ ช < Bโ ฌุตโ ฌ

โ ซโ ช9ุ 30 โ 9ุ 15โ ฌโ ฌ

โ ซโ ช11ุ 45 โ 9ุ 30โ ฌโ ฌ

โ ซ)โ ช 5โ ฌุฏโ ช 0 ? &O QJ 7โ ฌโ ฌ โ ซู โ ช 5โ ฌุฏโ ช( %; R QJ 7โ ฌโ ฌ

โ ซโ ช 0โ ฌู ุถ โ ช U % 0 9โ ฌโ ฌ โ ซุง โ ช 10) J Uโ ฌุฏโ ช&O QJ 7โ ฌโ ฌ โ ซ ? โ ช 0โ ฌู โ ช 5โ ฌุฏโ ชQJ 7โ ฌโ ฌ โ ซ โ ช( %; Rโ ฌโ ฌ

โ ซโ ช12ุ 00 โ 11ุ 45โ ฌโ ฌ

โ ซุฅ ุง โ ฌ

โ ซโ ช14ุ 00 โ 12ุ 00โ ฌโ ฌ

โ ซุงโ ช 6 78โ ฌุฏ ุงโ ช ASHโ ฌู ุฑ" โ ฌ โ ซโ ช20 +โ ฌโ ฌ

โ ซ โ ช $ %โ ฌุช โ ช J Uโ ฌู

ุชโ ฌ

โ ซโ ช15ุ 00 โ 13ุ 30โ ฌโ ฌ โ ซุงโ ช Hโ ฌุงู ู โ ช Kโ ฌุงโ ช IJโ ฌุงโ ช Hโ ฌุงู โ ฌ โ ซู ุง ุข> ุงโ ช 8โ ฌุง ?โ ช/โ ฌโ ฌ โ ซู ุง ุงุข ุช โ ช 1 Bโ ฌุง โ ช1 0 $โ ฌโ ฌ โ ซุง ู ู ุง โ ช +โ ฌุตโ ฌ โ ซู ุท โ ช/% 0โ ฌโ ฌ

โ ซโ ช15ุ 00 โ 14ุ 00โ ฌโ ฌ โ ซู โ ช & % T7โ ฌุง ? โ ช/0โ ฌโ ฌ โ ซ โ ช U %โ ฌุง โ ช J Uโ ฌโ ฌ

โ ซโ ช15ุ 00 โ 14ุ 30โ ฌโ ฌ โ ซ โ ช / S &Vโ ฌู โ ช UKโ ฌุฏุงุชโ ฌ

Mje. EPS's A?RABE 2010:Maquetaci贸n 1

12/2/10

11:08

P谩gina 8

‫ﻗﺮار اﻋﺘﻤﺪﺗﻪ اﻟﺠﻤﻌﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪ 21‬ﻛﺎﻧﻮن اﻷول‪/‬دﻳﺴﻤﺒﺮ ‪2001‬‬

‫‪A/RES/56/212‬‬

‫اﻟﻤﺪوﻧﺔ اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻴﺔ ﻷﺧﻼﻗﻴﺎت اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ‬

‫إن اﻟﺠﻤﻌﻴﺔ اﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‪،‬‬

‫إذ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ إﻟﻰ ﻗﺮارﻫﺎ ‪ 156/32‬اﻟﻤﺆرخ ‪ 19‬ﻛﺎﻧﻮن اﻷول‪/‬دﻳﺴﻤﺒﺮ ‪ 1977‬اﻟﺬي أﻗﺮت ﻓﻴﻪ اﻻﺗﻔﺎق‬ ‫ﺑﺸﺄن اﻟﺘﻌﺎون واﻟﻌﻼﻗﺎت ﺑﻴﻦ اﻷﻣﻢ اﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪة وﻣﻨﻈﻤﺔ اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫وإذ ﺗﺆﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﻔﻘﺮة ‪ 5‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮارﻫﺎ ‪ 41/36‬اﻟﻤﺆرخ ‪ 19‬ﺗﺸﺮﻳﻦ اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ‪/‬ﻧﻮﻓﻤﺒﺮ ‪ 1981‬اﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﺮرت ﻓﻴﻬﺎ أﻧﻪ ﻳﺠﻮز ﻟﻤﻨﻈﻤﺔ اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻴﺔ أن ﺗﺸﺎرك ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮار ﻓﻲ أﻋﻤﺎل اﻟﺠﻤﻌﻴﺔ اﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺠﺎﻻت اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻬﻢ ﺗﻠﻚ اﻟﻤﻨﻈﻤﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫وإذ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ إﻟﻰ إﻋﻼن ﻣﺎﻧﻴﻼ ﺑﺸﺄن اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻴﺔ اﻟﻤﺆرخ ‪ 10‬ﺗﺸﺮﻳﻦ اﻷول‪/‬أوﻛﺘﻮﺑﺮ ‪ 1980‬واﻟﺬي‬ ‫اﻋﺘﻤﺪ ﺑﺮﻋﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﻈﻤﺔ اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻴﺔ ‪ 1‬و إﻟﻰ إﻋﻼن رﻳﻮ ﺑﺸﺄن اﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ و اﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ‪ 2‬و ﺟﺪول أﻋﻤﺎل‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺮن ‪ 321‬اﻟﻠﺬﻳﻦ اﻋﺘﻤﺪا ﻓﻲ ﻣﺆﺗﻤﺮ اﻷﻣﻢ اﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪة اﻟﻤﻌﻨﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ و اﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ‪ 14‬ﺣﺰﻳﺮان‪/‬ﻳﻮﻧﻴﻪ‬ ‫‪ ،1992‬وإذ ﺗﺤﻴﻂ ﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺑﺈﻋﻼن ﻋﻤﺎن ﺑﺸﺄن ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ اﻟﺴﻼم ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ اﻟﺬي اﻋﺘﻤﺪ ﻓﻲ ‪11‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﺮﻳﻦ اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ‪/‬ﻧﻮﻓﻤﺒﺮ ‪ 2000‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺆﺗﻤﺮ اﻟﻘﻤﺔ اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ ﺑﺸﺄن ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ اﻟﺴﻼم ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ‪،4‬‬ ‫وإذ ﺗﺮى أن ﻟﺠﻨﺔ اﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﺪاﻣﺔ أﻋﺮﺑﺖ ﻓﻲ دورﺗﻬﺎ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻌﺔ اﻟﻤﻌﻘﻮدة ﻓﻲ ﻧﻴﺴﺎن‪/‬أﺑﺮﻳﻞ ‪1999‬‬ ‫ﻋﻦ اﻫﺘﻤﺎﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺪوﻧﺔ اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻴﺔ ﻷﺧﻼﻗﻴﺎت اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ودﻋﺖ ﻣﻨﻈﻤﺔ اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻴﺔ إﻟﻰ اﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫إﺷﺮاك اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎت اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ اﻟﻤﻠﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮع ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ اﻟﻤﺪوﻧﺔ اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻴﺔ ﻷﺧﻼﻗﻴﺎت اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ‬ ‫وﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ ورﺻﺪﻫﺎ‪،5‬‬ ‫وإذ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ إﻟﻰ ﻗﺮارﻫﺎ ‪ 200/53‬اﻟﻤﺆرخ ‪ 15‬ﻛﺎﻧﻮن اﻷول‪/‬دﻳﺴﻤﺒﺮ ‪ 1998‬ﺑﺸﺄن إﻋﻼن ﺳﻨﺔ ‪2002‬‬ ‫ﺳﻨﺔ دوﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ اﻹﻳﻜﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬اﻟﺬي ﻗﺎﻣﺖ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺿﻤﻦ أﻣﻮر أﺧﺮى ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮار‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺲ اﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎدي و اﻹﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ ‪ 40/1998‬اﻟﻤﺆرخ ‪ 30‬ﺗﻤﻮز‪/‬ﻳﻮﻟﻴﻪ ‪ 1998‬اﻟﺬي ﻳﻌﺘﺮف ﺑﺘﺄﻳﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﻤﺔ اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻴﺔ ﻷﻫﻤﻴﺔ اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ اﻹﻳﻜﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬وﻻﺳﻴﻤﺎ أﻫﻤﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ 2002‬اﻟﺴﻨﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺪوﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ اﻹﻳﻜﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﺰﻳﺰ ﺗﻔﺎﻫﻢ أﻓﻀﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ اﻟﺸﻌﻮب ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻜﺎن‪ ،‬وﻓﻲ زﻳﺎدة اﻟﺘﻮﻋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮاث اﻟﺜﺮي ﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻒ اﻟﺤﻀﺎرات‪ ،‬وﻓﻲ اﻟﻘﻴﺎم ﺑﺘﻘﻴﻴﻢ أﻓﻀﻞ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻢ اﻟﻤﺘﺄﺻﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ اﻟﺜﻘﺎﻓﺎت‪،‬‬ ‫وﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ اﻹﺳﻬﺎم ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﺰﻳﺰ اﻟﺴﻼم اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ‪،‬‬ ‫وإذ ﺗﺴﻠﻢ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻟﻠﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ و دور ﻫﺎﻣﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﻮﺻﻔﻬﺎ أداة إﻳﺠﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺄﻧﻬﺎ أن ﺗﺨﻔﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺪة‬ ‫اﻟﻔﻘﺮ وأن ﺗﺤﺴﻦ ﻧﻮﻋﻴﺔ ﺣﻴﺎة ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﻟﺸﻌﻮب‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ إﻣﻜﺎﻧﺎت ﺗﺴﻬﻢ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ اﻹﻗﺘﺼﺎدﻳﺔ‬ ‫واﻹﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬وﻻﺳﻴﻤﺎ ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ اﻟﺒﻠﺪان اﻟﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬وﺑﺒﺮوز اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﻘﻮة ﺣﻴﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﻌﺰﻳﺰ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﻫﻢ و اﻟﺴﻼم‬ ‫و اﻟﺮﺧﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺪوﻟﻲ‪،‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﺗﺤﻴﻂ ﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﻣﻊ اﻹﻫﺘﻤﺎم ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺪوﻧﺔ اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻴﺔ ﻷﺧﻼﻗﻴﺎت اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ اﻋﺘﻤﺪت ﻓﻲ اﻟﺪورة اﻟﺜﺎﻟﺜﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺸﺮة ﻟﻠﺠﻤﻌﻴﺔ اﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﻤﻨﻈﻤﺔ اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻴﺔ ‪ 6‬واﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻣﺒﺎدئ ﺗﻬﺪف إﻟﻰ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ وﺗﺼﻠﺢ ﻛﺈﻃﺎر ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻲ ﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻒ أﺻﺤﺎب اﻟﻤﺼﻠﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻄﺎع اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻐﺮض اﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ‬ ‫إﻟﻰ أدﻧﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻷﺛﺮ اﻟﺴﻠﺒﻲ ﻟﻠﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ وﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺮاث اﻟﺜﻘﺎﻓﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ اﻹﺳﺘﻔﺎدة إﻟﻰ‬ ‫أﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺰاﻳﺎ اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﺰﻳﺰ اﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﺪاﻣﺔ واﻟﺘﺨﻔﻴﻒ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻔﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ وﺗﻌﺰﻳﺰ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻔﺎﻫﻢ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ اﻷﻣﻢ؛‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﺗﺆﻛﺪ اﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ إﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﺰﻳﺰ اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ اﻟﻤﺴﺆوﻟﺔ واﻟﻤﺴﺘﺪاﻣﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ أن ﺗﻜﻮن ﻣﻔﻴﺪة ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﻗﻄﺎﻋﺎت اﻟﻤﺠﺘﻤﻊ؛‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﺗﺪﻋﻮ اﻟﺤﻜﻮﻣﺎت وﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ أﺻﺤﺎب اﻟﻤﺼﻠﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻄﺎع اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ إﻟﻰ اﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻓﻲ أدراج‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت اﻟﻤﺪوﻧﺔ اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻴﺔ ﻷﺧﻼﻗﻴﺎت اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺴﺐ اﻻﻗﺘﻀﺎء‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ اﻟﻘﻮاﻧﻴﻦ و اﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ و‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻤﺎرﺳﺎت اﻟﻤﻬﻨﻴﺔ ذات اﻟﺼﻠﺔ‪ ،‬و ﺗﻨﻮه ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺸﺄن ﺑﻤﺎ ﺑﺬﻟﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ اﻟﺪول ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﻮد‬ ‫و ﻣﺎ اﺗﺨﺬﺗﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺪاﺑﻴﺮ؛‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﺗﺸﺠﻊ ﻣﻨﻈﻤﺔ اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﺰﻳﺰ اﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ اﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺪوﻧﺔ اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻴﺔ ﻷﺧﻼﻗﻴﺎت‬ ‫اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ إﺷﺮاك أﺻﺤﺎب اﻟﻤﺼﻠﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻄﺎع اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺠﻬﺪ؛‬ ‫‪ -5‬ﺗﻄﻠﺐ إﻟﻰ اﻷﻣﻴﻦ اﻟﻌﺎم أن ﻳﺘﺎﺑﻊ اﻟﺘﻄﻮرات اﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻘﺮار اﺳﺘﻨﺎدا إﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﺎرﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﻤﺔ اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻴﺔ و أن ﻳﻘﺪم ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺮا ﻋﻦ ذﻟﻚ إﻟﻰ اﻟﺠﻤﻌﻴﺔ اﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ دورﺗﻬﺎ اﻟﺘﺎﺳﻌﺔ و‬ ‫اﻟﺨﻤﺴﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬

‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬

‫‪ ،A/36/236‬اﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪ ،‬اﻟﺘﺬﻳﻴﻞ اﻷول‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﺆﺗﻤﺮ اﻷﻣﻢ اﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪة اﻟﻤﻌﻨﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ و اﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬رﻳﻮ دي ﺟﺎﻧﻴﺮو‪ 14-3 ،‬ﺣﺰﻳﺮان‪/‬ﻳﻮﻧﻴﻪ ‪) 1992‬ﻣﻨﺸﻮرات‬ ‫اﻷﻣﻢ اﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪة‪ ،‬رﻗﻢ اﻟﻤﺒﻴﻊ ‪ A.93.I.8‬و اﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺒﺎن(‪ ،‬اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ اﻷول‪ :‬اﻟﻘﺮارات اﻟﺘﻲ اﺗﺨﺬﻫﺎ اﻟﻤﺆﺗﻤﺮ‪ ،‬اﻟﻘﺮار ‪،1‬‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ اﻷول‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ‪ ،‬اﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫أﻧﻈﺮ ‪.A/55/640‬‬ ‫أﻧﻈﺮ اﻟﻮﺛﺎﺋﻖ اﻟﺮﺳﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻠﺲ اﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎدي و اﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ ‪ ،1999‬اﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ رﻗﻢ ‪ ،(E/1999/29) 9‬اﻟﻤﻘﺮر ‪.3/7‬‬ ‫أﻧﻈﺮ ‪ ،E/2001/61‬اﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﺤﻦ أﻋﻀﺎء ﻣﻨﻈﻤﺔ اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﻤﺜﻠﻲ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﺔ اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻢ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺪوﺑﻲ اﻟــﺪول واﻷﻗﺎﻟﻴﻢ واﻟﻤﺸﺎرﻳﻊ‬ ‫واﻟﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎت واﻟﻬﻴﺌﺎت اﻟﺘﻲ اﺟﺘﻤﻌﺖ‬ ‫ﻓــﻲ اﻟﺠﻤﻌﻴﺔ اﻟــﻌــﺎﻣــﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﺎﻏﻮ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻴﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻴﻮم اﻷول‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﺮﻳﻦ اﻷول‪/‬أﻛﺘﻮﺑﺮ ‪1،1999‬‬ ‫إذ ﻧﺆﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ اﻷﻫﺪاف اﻟﺘﻲ ﻧﺼﺖ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ اﻟﻤﺎدة ‪ 3‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم اﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﻤﻨﻈﻤﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬وإذ ﻧــﺪرك ﻣﺎ ﻟﻬﺬه‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ”دور ﻣﺮﻛﺰي وﺣﺎﺳﻢ“‪ ،‬أﻗﺮﺗﻪ‬ ‫اﻟﺠﻤﻌﻴﺔ اﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﻸﻣﻢ اﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪة‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ‬ ‫اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ وﺗﻨﻤﻴﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ أﺟﻞ اﻟﻤﺴﺎﻫﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ اﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎدﻳﺔ واﻟﺘﻔﺎﻫﻢ اﻟﺪوﻟﻲ واﻟﺴﻼم‬ ‫واﻟﺮﻓﺎﻫﻴﺔ واﻻﺣــﺘــﺮام اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ ﻟﺤﻘﻮق‬ ‫اﻹﻧﺴﺎن واﻟﺤﺮﻳﺎت اﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ وﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺠﻤﻴﻊ دون ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ اﻟﻌﺮق أو‬ ‫اﻟﺠﻨﺲ أو اﻟﻠﻐﺔ أو اﻟﺪﻳﻦ‪،‬‬ ‫وإذ ﻧﺆﻣﻦ إﻳﻤﺎﻧﺎ راﺳﺨﺎ ﺑﺄن اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل ﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﺛﻪ ﻣﻦ اﺗﺼﺎﻻت ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮة‬ ‫وﻋﻔﻮﻳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺄﺛﺮة ﺑﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ اﻹﻋــﻼم‪،‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻦ رﺟﺎل وﻧﺴﺎء ﻳﻨﺘﻤﻮن ﻟﺜﻘﺎﻓﺎت ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‬ ‫وﻳﺘﺒﻌﻮن أﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺣﻴﺎة ﻣﺘﺒﺎﻳﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﻗﻮة‬ ‫ﺣﻴﻮﻳﺔ ﻹﺣــﻼل اﻟﺴﻼم وﻋﺎﻣﻼ ﻟﺘﻌﺰﻳﺰ‬ ‫اﻟﺼﺪاﻗﺔ واﻟﺘﻔﺎﻫﻢ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻌﻮب اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻢ‪،‬‬ ‫وﻋﻤﻼ ﺑﻤﻨﻄﻖ اﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﻖ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ اﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫واﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ اﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎدﻳﺔ وﻣﺤﺎرﺑﺔ اﻟﻔﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻧﺤﻮ ﻣﺴﺘﺪام‪ ،‬وﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻤﺎ ﺗﻮﺻﻠﺖ إﻟﻴﻪ اﻷﻣﻢ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪة ﻓﻲ ”ﻗﻤﺔ اﻷرض“ اﻟﺘﻲ ﻋﻘﺪت ﻓﻲ‬ ‫رﻳﻮ دي ﺟﺎﻧﻴﺮو ﻓﻲ ﻋﺎم ‪ ،1992‬وﻟﻤﺎ ﺗﺠﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺟﺪول أﻋﻤﺎل اﻟﻘﺮن اﻟﺤﺎدي واﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﻦ‬ ‫اﻟﺬي اﻋﺘﻤﺪه اﻟﻤﺆﺗﻤﺮ‪،‬‬ ‫وإذ ﻧﺄﺧﺬ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺤﺴﺒﺎن اﻟﻨﻤﻮ اﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫واﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ اﻟــﺬي ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺎﺿﻲ أو‬ ‫اﻟﺬي ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻊ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻘﻪ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﻤﻨﻈﻮر‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻨﺸﺎط اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮاء ﻛﺎن ذﻟﻚ ﻟﻸﻏﺮاض‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺮﻓﻴﻬﻴﺔ أو اﻟﺘﺠﺎرﻳﺔ أو اﻟﺜﻘﺎﻓﻴﺔ أو اﻟﺪﻳﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫أو اﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬واﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ اﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻬﺬا اﻟﻨﻤﻮ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺳــﻮاء ﻛﺎن إﻳﺠﺎﺑﻴﺎ أم ﺳﻠﺒﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫واﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎد واﻟﻤﺠﺘﻤﻊ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺪول‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻮﻟﺪة واﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﺔ‪ ،‬وﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﺠﺘﻤﻌﺎت‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ واﻟﺴﻜﺎن اﻷﺻﻠﻴﻴﻦ‪ ،‬وﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫اﻟﻌﻼﻗﺎت واﻟﺘﺠﺎرة اﻟﺪوﻟﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫وﺳﻌﻴﺎ ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺳﻴﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﺴﺆوﻟﺔ وﻣﺴﺘﺪاﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮن ﻓﻲ ﻣﺘﻨﺎول اﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ إﻃﺎر ﺣﻖ ﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﻓﺮد ﻓﻲ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام وﻗﺖ اﻟﻔﺮاغ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺘﺮﻓﻴﻪ أو‬ ‫اﻟﺴﻔﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ اﺣﺘﺮام ﻣﺎ ﺗﺨﺘﺎره اﻟﺸﻌﻮب ﻛﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺠﺘﻤﻌﺎﺗﻬﺎ‪،‬‬

‫واﻗﺘﻨﺎﻋﺎ ﻣﻊ ذﻟﻚ ﺑﺄن ﺻﻨﺎﻋﺔ اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻢ ﻛﻜﻞ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ أن ﺗﺤﻘﻖ اﻟﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻜﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺗﺸﺠﻊ اﻗﺘﺼﺎد‬ ‫اﻟﺴﻮق واﻟﻤﺸﺎرﻳﻊ اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ واﻟﺘﺠﺎرة‬ ‫اﻟﺤﺮة‪ ،‬وﺗﺘﻴﺢ اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ أﻓﻀﻞ وﺟﻪ‬ ‫إﻟﻰ آﺛﺎرﻫﺎ اﻟﻨﺎﻓﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻠﻖ اﻟﺜﺮوة وإﻳﺠﺎد‬ ‫ﻓﺮص اﻟﻌﻤﻞ‪،‬‬ ‫واﻧﻄﻼﻗﺎ ﻣﻦ اﻗﺘﻨﺎع راﺳﺦ ﺑﺄن اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺴﺆوﻟﺔ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﺪاﻣﺔ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻌﺎرض ﻣﻊ اﻟﺘﺤﺮر‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻄﺮد ﻓﻲ اﻟــﺸــﺮوط اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺨﻀﻊ ﻟﻬﺎ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺠﺎرة ﻓﻲ اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎت‪ ،‬واﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﺸﺎرﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﻫﺬا اﻟﻘﻄﺎع ﻓﻲ ﻇﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬وذﻟﻚ ﺷﺮﻳﻄﺔ اﺣﺘﺮام‬ ‫ﻋﺪد ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﺒﺎدئ واﻻﻟﺘﺰام ﺑﻘﻮاﻋﺪ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫وﺑﺄن ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ اﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻘﻄﺎع ﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻦ اﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎد واﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬وﺑﻴﻦ اﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ واﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫وﺑﻴﻦ اﻻﻧﻔﺘﺎح ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺠﺎرة اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻴﺔ وﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻬﻮﻳﺔ اﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ واﻟﺜﻘﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫وإذ ﻧﺄﺧﺬ ﻓﻲ اﻹﻋﺘﺒﺎر أﻧﻪ وﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻬﺬا‬ ‫اﻟﻨﻬﺞ ﺗﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ أﺻﺤﺎب اﻟﻤﺼﻠﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺳﻠﻄﺎت وﻃﻨﻴﺔ وإﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫وﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬وﻣﺸﺎرﻳﻊ وﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎت أﻋﻤﺎل‪،‬‬ ‫واﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻘﻄﺎع‪ ،‬واﻟﻤﻨﻈﻤﺎت ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫اﻟﺤﻜﻮﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬وﻛﺎﻓﺔ أﻧﻮاع اﻟﻬﻴﺌﺎت اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺘﻤﻲ‬ ‫إﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﺔ اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ‪ ،‬وﻛﺬﻟﻚ اﻟﻤﺠﺘﻤﻌﺎت‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻤﻀﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ووﺳــﺎﺋــﻞ اﻹﻋــﻼم‬ ‫واﻟﺴﻴﺎح أﻧﻔﺴﻬﻢ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺆوﻟﻴﺎت ﻣﺘﺒﺎﻳﻨﺔ وإن‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺘﺮاﺑﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ اﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ اﻟﻔﺮدﻳﺔ‬ ‫واﻟﻤﺠﺘﻤﻌﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ‪ ،‬وأن ﺗﺪوﻳﻦ ﺣﻘﻮق‬ ‫وواﺟﺒﺎت ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﻢ ﺳﻴﺴﻬﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﻫﺬا‬ ‫اﻟﻬﺪف‪،‬‬ ‫واﻟﺘﺰاﻣﺎ ﻣﻨﺎ ﺑﺎﻷﻫﺪاف اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﻌﻰ ﻣﻨﻈﻤﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﻣﻨﺬ اﻋﺘﻤﺎد‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻌﻴﺘﻬﺎ اﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ اﻟﻤﻨﻌﻘﺪة ﻓﻲ اﺳﻄﻨﺒﻮل ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ 1997‬ﻟﻠﻘﺮار رﻗﻢ ‪) 364‬د ‪ (12‬ﻓﻴﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺈﻳﺠﺎد ﺷﺮاﻛﺔ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ أﺻﺤﺎب‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺼﻠﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﻴﻦ‬ ‫اﻟﻌﺎم واﻟﺨﺎص‪ ،‬وﺣﺮﺻﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﻮﺳﻊ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬه اﻟﺸﺮاﻛﺔ وﻫﺬا اﻟﺘﻌﺎون ﺑﺎﻧﻔﺘﺎح‬ ‫وﺗـــﻮازن‪ ،‬ﻟﻴﺸﻤﻞ اﻟﻌﻼﻗﺎت ﺑﻴﻦ اﻟــﺪول‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺼﺪرة واﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﺔ وﺻﻨﺎﻋﺎﺗﻬﺎ اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫وﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻤﺎ ﻧﺺ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ إﻋﻼن ﻣﺎﻧﻴﻼ ﻟﻌﺎم‬ ‫‪ 1980‬ﻋﻦ اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬وإﻋــﻼن‬ ‫ﻣﺎﻧﻴﻼ ﻟﻌﺎم ‪ 1997‬ﻋﻦ اﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ اﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ‪ ،‬وﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻣﻴﺜﺎق اﻟﺤﻘﻮق اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ‬ ‫وﻣﺪوﻧﺔ اﻟﺴﺎﺋﺢ اﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪة ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﻓﻴﺎ ﻋﺎم‬ ‫‪ 1985‬ﺑﺮﻋﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﻈﻤﺔ اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻴﺔ‪،‬‬

‫وإذ ﻧﻌﺘﻘﺪ ﻣﻊ ذﻟﻚ ﺑﻀﺮورة اﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎل‬ ‫ﻫــﺬه اﻟﺼﻜﻮك ﺑﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣــﻦ اﻟﻤﺒﺎدئ‬ ‫اﻟﻼزﻣﺔ ﻟﺘﻔﺴﻴﺮﻫﺎ وﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ‬ ‫أﺻﺤﺎب اﻟﻤﺼﻠﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻻﻟﺘﺰام ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻠﻮﻛﻬﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻄﻠﻊ اﻟﻘﺮن‬ ‫اﻟﺤﺎدي واﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﻦ‪،‬‬ ‫وإذ ﻧﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎق اﻟﺼﻚ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻌﺎرﻳﻒ واﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻔﺎت اﻟــﺘــﻲ ﺗﻨﻄﺒﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺴﻔﺮ‪ ،‬ﺧﺼﻮﺻﺎ ﻣﻔﻬﻮم ”اﻟﺰاﺋﺮ“‬ ‫و”اﻟﺴﺎﺋﺢ“ و ”اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ“ اﻟﺘﻲ أﺧﺬ ﺑﻬﺎ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺆﺗﻤﺮ اﻟﺪوﻟﻲ اﻟﻤﻨﻌﻘﺪ ﻓﻲ أوﺗــﺎوا ﻓﻲ‬ ‫اﻟﻔﺘﺮة ﻣﻦ ‪ 24‬إﻟــﻰ ‪ 28‬ﺣﺰﻳﺮان‪/‬ﻳﻮﻧﻴﻮ‬ ‫‪ ،1991‬واﻟﺘﻲ أﻗﺮﺗﻬﺎ ﻟﺠﻨﺔ اﻹﺣﺼﺎءات‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻸﻣﻢ اﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪة ﻓﻲ دورﺗﻬﺎ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬ ‫واﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﻦ‪،‬‬

‫• اﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺔ ﺣﻘﻮق اﻟﻄﻔﻞ ﺑﺘﺎرﻳﺦ ‪ 26‬ﻛﺎﻧﻮن‬ ‫اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ‪/‬ﻳﻨﺎﻳﺮ ‪،1990‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺮار اﻟﺠﻤﻌﻴﺔ اﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﻤﻨﻈﻤﺔ اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ دورﺗﻬﺎ اﻟﺘﺎﺳﻌﺔ اﻟﻤﻨﻌﻘﺪة‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﻮﻳﻨﻮس أﻳﺮﻳﺲ ﺑﺸﺄن ﺗﻴﺴﻴﺮات‬ ‫اﻟﺴﻔﺮ وﺳﻼﻣﺔ وأﻣﻦ اﻟﺴﺎﺋﺤﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﺘﺎرﻳﺦ‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺗﺸﺮﻳﻦ اﻷول‪/‬أﻛﺘﻮﺑﺮ ‪،1991‬‬ ‫• إﻋــﻼن رﻳــﻮ دي ﺟﺎﻧﻴﺮو ﺑﺸﺄن اﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫واﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺘﺎرﻳﺦ ‪ 13‬ﺣﺰﻳﺮان‪/‬ﻳﻮﻧﻴﻮ‬ ‫‪،1992‬‬ ‫• اﻻﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺔ اﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﺘﺠﺎرة اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎت ﺑﺘﺎرﻳﺦ‬ ‫‪ 15‬ﻧﻴﺴﺎن‪/‬أﺑﺮﻳﻞ ‪،1994‬‬

‫وإذ ﻧﺸﻴﺮ ﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﺧــﺎص إﻟــﻰ اﻟﺼﻜﻮك‬ ‫اﻵﺗﻴﺔ‪:‬‬

‫• اﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﻨﻮع اﻟﺒﻴﻮﻟﻮﺟﻲ ﺑﺘﺎرﻳﺦ ‪ 6‬ﻛﺎﻧﻮن‬ ‫اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ‪/‬ﻳﻨﺎﻳﺮ ‪،1995‬‬

‫• اﻹﻋﻼن اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ ﻟﺤﻘﻮق اﻹﻧﺴﺎن اﻟﺼﺎدر‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ‪ 10‬ﻛﺎﻧﻮن اﻷول‪/‬دﻳﺴﻤﺒﺮ ‪،1948‬‬

‫• ﻗﺮار اﻟﺠﻤﻌﻴﺔ اﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﻤﻨﻈﻤﺔ اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ دورﺗــﻬــﺎ اﻟﺤﺎدﻳﺔ ﻋﺸﺮة‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻨﻌﻘﺪة ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﻫﺮة ﺑﺸﺄن ﻣﻨﻊ اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺠﻨﺴﻴﺔ اﻟﻤﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﺑﺘﺎرﻳﺦ ‪ 22‬ﺗﺸﺮﻳﻦ‬ ‫اﻷول‪/‬أﻛﺘﻮﺑﺮ ‪،1995‬‬

‫• اﻟﻌﻬﺪ اﻟــﺪوﻟــﻲ ﻟﻠﺤﻘﻮق اﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎدﻳﺔ‬ ‫واﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ واﻟﺜﻘﺎﻓﻴﺔ اﻟﺼﺎدر ﻓﻲ ‪16‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻧﻮن اﻷول‪/‬دﻳﺴﻤﺒﺮ ‪،1966‬‬ ‫• اﻟﻌﻬﺪ اﻟﺪوﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﺤﻘﻮق اﻟﻤﺪﻧﻴﺔ واﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺼﺎدر ﻓﻲ ‪ 16‬ﻛﺎﻧﻮن اﻷول‪/‬دﻳﺴﻤﺒﺮ‬ ‫‪،1966‬‬ ‫• اﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺔ وارﺳﻮ ﺑﺸﺄن اﻟﻨﻘﻞ اﻟﺠﻮي ﺑﺘﺎرﻳﺦ‬ ‫‪ 12‬ﺗﺸﺮﻳﻦ اﻷول‪/‬أﻛﺘﻮﺑﺮ ‪،1929‬‬ ‫• اﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺔ ﺷﻴﻜﺎﻏﻮ ﺑﺸﺄن اﻟﻄﻴﺮان اﻟﻤﺪﻧﻲ‬ ‫اﻟﺪوﻟﻲ ﺑﺘﺎرﻳﺦ ‪ 7‬ﻛﺎﻧﻮن اﻷول‪/‬دﻳﺴﻤﺒﺮ‬ ‫‪ ،1944‬واﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺎت ﻃﻮﻛﻴﻮ وﻻﻫــﺎي‬ ‫وﻣﻮﻧﺘﺮﻳﺎل ﺑﻬﺬا اﻟﺸﺄن‪،‬‬ ‫• اﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﺴﻬﻴﻼت اﻟﺠﻤﺮﻛﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺑــﺘــﺎرﻳــﺦ ‪ 4‬ﺗــﻤــﻮز‪/‬ﻳــﻮﻟــﻴــﻮ ‪1954‬‬ ‫واﻟﺒﺮوﺗﻮﻛﻮل اﻟﺨﺎص ﺑﻬﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫• اﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺔ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ اﻟﺘﺮاث اﻟﺜﻘﺎﻓﻲ واﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﺎرﻳﺦ ‪ 23‬ﺗﺸﺮﻳﻦ اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ‪/‬ﻧﻮﻓﻤﺒﺮ ‪،1972‬‬ ‫• إﻋــﻼن ﻣﺎﻧﻴﻼ ﺑﺸﺄن اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺑــﺘــﺎرﻳــﺦ ‪ 10‬ﺗﺸﺮﻳﻦ اﻷول‪/‬أﻛــﺘــﻮﺑــﺮ‬ ‫‪،1980‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺮار اﻟﺠﻤﻌﻴﺔ اﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﻤﻨﻈﻤﺔ اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ دورﺗﻬﺎ اﻟﺴﺎدﺳﺔ اﻟﻤﻨﻌﻘﺪة ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﻓﻴﺎ ﺑﺎﻋﺘﻤﺎد ﻣﻴﺜﺎق اﻟﺤﻘﻮق اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ‬ ‫واﻟﻤﺪوﻧﺔ اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺘﺎرﻳﺦ ‪ 26‬أﻳﻠﻮل‪/‬‬ ‫ﺳﺒﺘﻤﺒﺮ ‪،1985‬‬

‫• إﻋــﻼن ﺳﺘﻮﻛﻬﻮﻟﻢ ﺑﺘﺎرﻳﺦ ‪ 28‬آب ‪/‬‬ ‫اﻏﺴﻄﺲ ‪ 1996‬ﺿﺪ ﺗﺠﺎرة اﻻﺳﺘﻐﻼل‬ ‫اﻟﺠﻨﺴﻲ ﻟﻸﻃﻔﺎل‪،‬‬ ‫• إﻋﻼن ﻣﺎﻧﻴﻼ ﺑﺸﺄن اﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ اﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺘﺎرﻳﺦ ‪22‬أﻳﺎر‪/‬ﻣﺎﻳﻮ ‪،1997‬‬ ‫• اﻻﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺎت واﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﺎت اﻟﺘﻲ اﻋﺘﻤﺪﺗﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﻤﺔ اﻟﻌﻤﻞ اﻟﺪوﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﺎل اﻻﺗﻔﺎﻗﺎت‬ ‫اﻟﺠﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ وﺣــﻈــﺮ اﻟﺴﺨﺮة وﻋﻤﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫اﻷﻃﻔﺎل واﻟــﺪﻓــﺎع ﻋﻦ ﺣﻘﻮق اﻟﺴﻜﺎن‬ ‫اﻷﺻﻠﻴﻴﻦ واﻟﻤﺴﺎواة ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ وﻋﺪم‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮاﻗﻊ اﻟﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﺆﻛﺪ اﻟﺤﻖ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ وﺣﺮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻘﻞ اﻟﺴﺎﺋﺤﻴﻦ‪،‬‬ ‫وﻧﻌﻠﻦ ﻋﻦ رﻏﺒﺘﻨﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﺰﻳﺰ ﻧﻈﺎم‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺎﺣﻲ ﻋﺎﻟﻤﻲ ﻣﻨﺼﻒ وﻣﺴﺆول‬ ‫وﻣﺴﺘﺪام ﻳﻌﻮد ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻔﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﻄﺎﻋﺎت اﻟﻤﺠﺘﻤﻊ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ اﻗﺘﺼﺎد‬ ‫دوﻟﻲ ﻣﺘﺤﺮر وﻣﻔﺘﻮح‪،‬‬ ‫وﻧﻌﻠﻦ رﺳﻤﻴﺎ ﻗﺒﻮﻟﻨﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺒﺎدئ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺪوﻧﺔ اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻴﺔ ﻵداب‬ ‫اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ‪:‬‬

‫وﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻷي ﺗﺨﺮﻳﺐ ﻣﺘﻌﻤﺪ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﺮاﻓﻖ اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ أو ﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ اﻟﺘﺮاث‬ ‫اﻟﺜﻘﺎﻓﻲ أو اﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪.‬‬

‫اﻟﻤﺎدة اﻷوﻟﻰ‬ ‫إﺳﻬﺎم اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﻫﻢ‬ ‫واﻻﺣﺘﺮام اﻟﻤﺘﺒﺎدل ﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫اﻟﺸﻌﻮب واﻟﻤﺠﺘﻤﻌﺎت‪:‬‬ ‫‪ (1‬ﻳﺸﻜﻞ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﻫﻢ وﺗﻌﺰﻳﺰ اﻟﻘﻴﻢ اﻷﺧﻼﻗﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺘﻌﺎرف ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ اﻟﺒﺸﺮ‪ ،‬إﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫إﻟﻰ اﻟﺘﺴﺎﻣﺢ واﺣﺘﺮام ﺗﻨﻮع اﻟﻌﻘﺎﺋﺪ‬ ‫اﻟﺪﻳﻨﻴﺔ واﻟﻔﻠﺴﻔﻴﺔ واﻷﺧﻼﻗﻴﺔ‪ ،‬أﺳﺎﺳﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ اﻟﻤﺴﻮؤﻟﺔ وﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﺬا‬ ‫ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻷﺻﺤﺎب اﻟﻤﺼﻠﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ وﻟﻠﺴﺎﺋﺤﻴﻦ أﻧﻔﺴﻬﻢ ﻣﺮاﻋﺎة‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻘﺎﻟﻴﺪ واﻟﻌﺎدات اﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ واﻟﺜﻘﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻜﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﺸﻌﻮب‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ اﻷﻗﻠﻴﺎت‬ ‫واﻟــﺴــﻜــﺎن اﻷﺻــﻠــﻴــﻮن واﻻﻋــﺘــﺮاف‬ ‫ﺑﻘﻴﻤﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪(2‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ اﻟﻘﻴﺎم ﺑﺎﻷﻧﺸﻄﺔ اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻧﺤﻮ ﻳﻨﺴﺠﻢ ﻣﻊ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ وﺗﻘﺎﻟﻴﺪ‬ ‫اﻷﻗﺎﻟﻴﻢ واﻟـــﺪول اﻟﻤﻀﻴﻔﺔ وﻳﺤﺘﺮم‬ ‫ﻗﻮاﻧﻴﻨﻬﺎ وأﻋﺮاﻓﻬﺎ وﻋﺎداﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ـﺮف اﻟﻤﺠﺘﻤﻌﺎت‬ ‫‪ (3‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ أن ﺗــﺘــﻌـ ّ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻀﻴﻔﺔ واﻟﻤﺸﺘﻐﻠﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺴﺎﺋﺤﻴﻦ اﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﻳﺰوروﻧﻬﻢ وأن‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻌﺮف ﻋﻠﻰ أﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺘﺮﻣﻬﻢ وأن‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫ﺣﻴﺎﺗﻬﻢ وأذواﻗﻬﻢ وﺗﻮﻗﻌﺎﺗﻬﻢ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺑﺄن‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻢ وﺗﺪرﻳﺐ اﻟﻤﺸﺘﻐﻠﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﻬﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﻦ اﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل اﻟﺴﺎﺋﺤﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫اﻟﻨﺤﻮ اﻟﻼﺋﻖ ﺑﻬﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (4‬ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺴﻠﻄﺎت اﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ اﻟﺴﺎﺋﺤﻴﻦ‬ ‫واﻟﺰاﺋﺮﻳﻦ وﻣﻤﺘﻠﻜﺎﺗﻬﻢ‪ ،‬وﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ أن‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻟﻲ اﻫﺘﻤﺎﻣﺎ ﺧﺎﺻﺎ ﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ اﻟﺴﺎﺋﺤﻴﻦ‬ ‫اﻷﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺑﺤﻜﻢ وﺿﻌﻬﻢ اﻟﺬي ﻳﺴﻬﻞ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻪ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻬﻢ ﻟﻠﺨﻄﺮ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ أن‬ ‫ﺗﺴ ّﻬﻞ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام وﺳﺎﺋﻞ اﻟﺤﺼﻮل ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت واﻟﻮﻗﺎﻳﺔ واﻷﻣﻦ واﻟﺘﺄﻣﻴﻦ‬ ‫واﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪة اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺤﺘﺎﺟﻮن إﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ أن ﺗﺪان ﺑﺸﺪة أﻳﺔ ﻫﺠﻤﺎت أو‬ ‫اﻋﺘﺪاءات أو ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺧﻄﻒ أو ﺗﻬﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ أو اﻟﻤﺸﺘﻐﻠﻴﻦ ﺑﻬﺎ واﻟﻤﻌﺎﻗﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﺪة‪ ،‬وﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻮاﻧﻴﻦ اﻟﻮﻃﻨﻴﺔ‪،‬‬

‫‪ (5‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻟﻠﺴﺎﺋﺤﻴﻦ واﻟــﺰاﺋــﺮﻳــﻦ أﺛﻨﺎء‬ ‫ﺳﻔﺮﻫﻢ ﻋﺪم ارﺗﻜﺎب أي ﻓﻌﻞ إﺟﺮاﻣﻲ‬ ‫أو أي ﻓﻌﻞ ﻳﻌﺪ إﺟﺮاﻣﻴﺎ وﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻘﻮاﻧﻴﻦ‬ ‫اﻟﺪوﻟﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺰوروﻧﻬﺎ‪ ،‬وﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ أن‬ ‫ﻳﻤﺘﻨﻌﻮا ﻋﻦ اﺗﺒﺎع أي ﺳﻠﻮك ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ‬ ‫اﻟﺴﻜﺎن اﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﻮن أﻧﻪ ﻋﺪاﺋﻲ أو ﻣﺆذ‬ ‫أو ﻳﺤﺘﻤﻞ أن ﻳﺤﺪث أﺿﺮارا ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬وﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻟﻬﻢ اﻻﻣﺘﻨﺎع ﻛﺬﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﻛﻞ أﻧــﻮاع اﻻﺗﺠﺎر ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺨﺪرات‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ اﻟﻤﺸﺮوﻋﺔ أو اﻷﺳﻠﺤﺔ أو اﻵﺛﺎر‬ ‫أو اﻷﻧـــﻮاع اﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ أو اﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎت‬ ‫واﻟــﻤــﻮاد اﻟــﺨــﻄــﺮة أو اﻟﻤﺤﻈﻮرة‬ ‫ﺑﻤﻘﺘﻀﻰ اﻟﺘﺸﺮﻳﻌﺎت اﻟﻮﻃﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (6‬ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺴﺎﺋﺤﻴﻦ واﻟــﺰاﺋــﺮﻳــﻦ‪ ،‬ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻐﺎدرة‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺆوﻟﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﻌﺮف ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ اﻟـــﺪول اﻟــﺘــﻲ ﻳﻌﺘﺰﻣﻮن‬ ‫زﻳﺎرﺗﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﻢ ﻣﺮاﻋﺎة‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺨﺎﻃﺮ اﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ واﻷﻣﻨﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮن ﻣﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﻨﺪ ﺳﻔﺮﻫﻢ إﻟﻰ ﺧﺎرج‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎن إﻗﺎﻣﺘﻬﻢ اﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎد‪ ،‬واﻟﺘﺼﺮف‬ ‫ﺗﺠﺎﻫﻬﺎ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ّ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻜﻨﻬﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺨـﺎﻃﺮ إﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻫﺎ اﻷدﻧﻰ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (2‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ أن ﺗﺮاﻋﻲ اﻷﻧﺸﻄﺔ اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺴﺎواة ﺑﻴﻦ اﻟﺮﺟﻞ واﻟﻤﺮأة وﺗﻌﺰﻳﺰ‬ ‫ﺣﻘﻮق اﻹﻧﺴﺎن‪ ،‬ﺧﺼﻮﺻﺎ اﻟﺤﻘﻮق‬ ‫اﻟﻔﺮدﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎت اﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮض ﻟﻸﺧﻄﺎر‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺳﻴﻤﺎ اﻷﻃﻔﺎل‬ ‫واﻟﺸﻴﻮخ واﻟﻤﻌﺎﻗﻴﻦ واﻷﻗﻠﻴﺎت اﻟﻌﺮﻗﻴﺔ‬ ‫واﻟﺴﻜﺎن اﻷﺻﻠﻴﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (3‬ﻳﺘﻌﺎرض اﺳﺘﻐﻼل اﻟﺒﺸﺮ ﺑﺄي ﺷﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ اﻷﺷﻜﺎل‪ ،‬ﺧﺼﻮﺻﺎ اﻻﺳﺘﻐﻼل‬ ‫اﻟﺠﻨﺴﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣــﻊ اﻷﻫـــﺪاف اﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ‪ ،‬وﻳﻌﺪ إﻧﻜﺎرا ﻟﻬﺎ ﻻ ﺳﻴﻤﺎ‬ ‫إذا اﺳــﺘــﻬــﺪف اﻷﻃــﻔــﺎل‪ .‬وﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ‪،‬‬ ‫وﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﻧﻮن اﻟــﺪوﻟــﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﺎرﺑﺔ ﻫﺬا‬ ‫اﻻﺳﺘﻐﻼل ﺑﻜﻞ ﻗﻮة ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل اﻟﺘﻌﺎون‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﻟﺪول اﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﺔ‪ ،‬وأن ﺗﻌﺎﻗﺐ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ اﻟﺘﺸﺮﻳﻌﺎت اﻟﻮﻃﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫اﻟــﺪول اﻟﻤﻀﻴﻔﺔ واﻟــﺪول اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ‬ ‫إﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺗﻜﺒﻮ ﻫﺬه اﻷﻋﻤﺎل ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻮ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻗﺪ ﺣﺪﺛﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺎرج‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (4‬اﻟﺴﻔﺮ ﻟﻸﻏﺮاض اﻟﺪﻳﻨﻴﺔ واﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ‬ ‫وﻷﻏــﺮاض اﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ واﻟﺘﺒﺎدل اﻟﺜﻘﺎﻓﻲ‬ ‫واﻟﻠﻐﻮي ﻣﻦ أﺷﻜﺎل اﻟﺴﻔﺮ اﻟﻤﻔﻴﺪة ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻧﺤﻮ ﺧﺎص‪ ،‬وﻫﻲ ﺟﺪﻳﺮة ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﺠﻴﻊ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (5‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ أﻳﻀﺎ اﻟﺘﺸﺠﻴﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ أن ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻨﺎﻫﺞ اﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎ ﺑﺄﻫﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﺒﺎدﻟﻪ‬ ‫اﻟﺴﺎﺋﺤﻮن وﺑﺠﺪوى اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ اﻗﺘﺼﺎدﻳﺎ‬ ‫واﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺎ وﺛﻘﺎﻓﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻀﻼ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻴﺎن‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬

‫اﻟﻤﺎدة اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺄداة ﻟﻠ ُﺮﻗﻲ‬ ‫اﻟﻔﺮدي واﻟﺠﻤﺎﻋﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ (1‬ﻳﺮﺗﺒﻂ اﻟﻨﺸﺎط اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻲ‪ ،‬ﻋﺎدة‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻟﺮاﺣﺔ‬ ‫واﻻﺳﺘﺠﻤﺎم واﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﺔ وﺑﻜﻮﻧﻪ ﺳﺒﻴﻼ‬ ‫إﻟﻰ اﻟﺜﻘﺎﻓﺔ واﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬا ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ أن‬ ‫ﻳﺮاﻋﻰ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻟﻬﺎ وﻣﻤﺎرﺳﺘﻬﺎ‬ ‫أﻧﻬﺎ وﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﻣﺘﻤﻴﺰة ﻟﻠﺮﻗﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮى‬ ‫اﻟﻔﺮدي واﻟﺠﻤﺎﻋﻲ؛ وﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻤﺎرﺳﺔ ﻫﺬا‬ ‫اﻟﻨﺸﺎط ﺑﻌﻘﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮا ﻻ ﻣﺜﻴﻞ ﻟﻪ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻠﻢ واﻟﺘﺴﺎﻣﺢ‬ ‫واﻟﺘﻌﺮف ﻋﻠﻰ اﻻﺧﺘﻼﻓﺎت اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫اﻟﺸﻌﻮب واﻟﺜﻘﺎﻓﺎت واﻟﺘﻨﻮع ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬

‫اﻟﻤﺎدة اﻟﺜﺎﻟﺜﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺴﺘﺪاﻣﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ (1‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ أﺻﺤﺎب اﻟﻤﺼﻠﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ اﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ اﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻘﺼﺪ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﻧﻤ ّﻮ‬ ‫اﻗﺘﺼﺎدي ﻣﺘﻮاﺻﻞ وﻣﺴﺘﺪام ﻳﺘﺠﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﺤﻮ ﺗﻠﺒﻴﺔ اﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎت وﺗﻄﻠﻌﺎت‬ ‫اﻟﺠﻴﻞ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ واﻷﺟــﻴــﺎل اﻟﻘﺎدﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻋﺎدﻟﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (2‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻟﻠﺴﻠﻄﺎت اﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ اﻟﻮﻃﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫واﻹﻗــﻠــﻴــﻤــﻴــﺔ واﻟــﻤــﺤــﻠــﻴــﺔ إﻋــﻄــﺎء‬ ‫اﻷوﻟــﻮﻳــﺔ واﻟﺘﺸﺠﻴﻊ ﻟﻜﺎﻓﺔ أﺷﻜﺎل‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗــﺆدي إﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺻﻮن اﻟﻤﻮارد اﻟﺸﺤﻴﺤﺔ واﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺧﺼﻮﺻﺎ اﻟﻤﻴﺎه واﻟــﻄــﺎﻗــﺔ‪ ،‬وأن‬ ‫ﺗﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺑﻘﺪر اﻹﻣﻜﺎن اﻹﻧﺘﺎج اﻟﺬي‬ ‫ﻳﺨﻠﻒ اﻟﻨﻔﺎﻳﺎت‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (3‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ اﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮزﻳﻊ ﺗﺪﻓﻘﺎت‬ ‫اﻟﺴﻴﺎح ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ اﻟﺰﻣﺎن واﻟﻤﻜﺎن‪،‬‬ ‫ﺧﺼﻮﺻﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻨﺠﻢ ﻋﻦ اﻹﺟــﺎزات‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻓﻮﻋﺔ اﻷﺟﺮ وﻋﻄﻼت اﻟﻤﺪارس‪،‬‬ ‫واﻟﺘﻮﺻﻞ إﻟﻰ ﺗﻮازن أﻓﻀﻞ ﻳﺨﻔﻒ‬ ‫ﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﻨﺸﺎط اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫وﻳﻌﺰز أﺛــﺮه اﻟﻤﻔﻴﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ واﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎد اﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (4‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ أن ﻳﺮاﻋﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ اﻟﺒﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻷﺳــﺎﺳــﻴــﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ وﻓــﻲ ﺑﺮﻣﺠﺔ‬ ‫اﻷﻧﺸﻄﺔ اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺿﺮورة ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫اﻟــﺘــﺮاث اﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ اﻟــﻤــﺆﻟــﻒ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫اﻟﻨﻈﻢ اﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ واﻟﺘﻨﻮع اﻟﺒﻴﻮﻟﻮﺟﻲ‬ ‫وﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺤﻴﺎة اﻟﺒﺮﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫أﻧﻮاع ﻣﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻄﺮ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ‬ ‫ﻷﺻــﺤــﺎب اﻟﻤﺼﻠﺤﺔ ﻓــﻲ اﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺳﻴﻤﺎ اﻟﻤﺸﺘﻐﻠﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ‪ ،‬أن ﻳﺘﻘﺒﻠﻮا ﻓﺮض ﺣﺪود‬ ‫وﻗﻴﻮد ﻋﻠﻰ اﻷﻧﺸﻄﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻘﻮﻣﻮن‬ ‫ﺑﻬﺎ‪ ،‬وﻻﺳﻴﻤﺎ إذا ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﺬه ﺗﺘﻢ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ذات ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ اﻟﺼﺤﺮاوﻳﺔ أو اﻟﻘﻄﺒﻴﺔ‬ ‫أو ﻓــﻲ أﻋــﺎﻟــﻲ اﻟﺠﺒﺎل واﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ‬ ‫اﻟﺴﺎﺣﻠﻴﺔ واﻟﻐﺎﺑﺎت اﻻﺳﺘﻮاﺋﻴﺔ أو‬ ‫اﻷراﺿــﻲ اﻟﺮﻃﺒﺔ‪ ،‬وﻫــﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻹﻳﺠﺎد اﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺎت اﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‬ ‫أو ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (5‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﺴﻠﻢ ﺑﻪ أن ﺳﻴﺎﺣﺔ اﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﺔ‬ ‫واﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ اﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻳﺴﻬﻤﺎن ﻓﻲ إﺛﺮاء‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻲ واﻟﻨﻬﻮض ﺑﻪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺑﺸﺮط اﺣﺘﺮاﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺮاث اﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ‬ ‫وﻟﻠﺴﻜﺎن اﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﻴﻦ وﺣﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﻤﺎ ﻟﻠﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫اﻻﺳﺘﻴﻌﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻮاﻗﻊ‪.‬‬

‫اﻟﻤﺎدة اﻟﺮاﺑﻌﺔ‬

‫اﻟﻤﺎدة اﻟﺨﺎﻣﺴﺔ‬

‫اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻟﺘﺮاث‬ ‫اﻹﻧﺴﺎﻧﻴﺔ اﻟﺜﻘﺎﻓﻲ وﻛﻤﺴﺎﻫﻢ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﺰﻳﺰه‪:‬‬

‫اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ﻧﺸﺎط ﻧﺎﻓﻊ ﻟﻠﺪول‬ ‫واﻟﻤﺠﺘﻤﻌﺎت اﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻀﻴﻔﺔ‪:‬‬

‫‪ (1‬اﻟﻤﻮارد اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮاث‬ ‫اﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ اﻟﻤﺸﺘﺮك؛ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﺘﻤﻌﺎت‬ ‫اﻟــﺘــﻲ ﺗــﻘــﻊ ﺗــﻠــﻚ اﻟـــﻤـــﻮارد ﻓﻲ‬ ‫أراﺿــﻴــﻬــﺎ ﺣﻘﻮﻗﻬﺎ وواﺟــﺒــﺎﺗــﻬــﺎ‬ ‫اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺼﺪد‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (2‬ﻳــﻨــﺒــﻐــﻲ ﺗــﻨــﻔــﻴــﺬ اﻟــﺴــﻴــﺎﺳــﺎت‬ ‫واﻟﻨﺸﺎﻃﺎت اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑــﺎﺣــﺘــﺮام اﻟــﺘــﺮاث اﻟﻔﻨﻲ‬ ‫واﻷﺛـــﺮي واﻟﺜﻘﺎﻓﻲ واﻟﻤﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ وﻧﻘﻠﻪ ﻟﻸﺟﻴﺎل اﻟﻘﺎدﻣﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺑــﺬل ﻋﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺤﻔﻆ اﻷﺑﻨﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺨﻴﺔ واﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ‬ ‫اﻟــﻤــﻘــﺪﺳــﺔ واﻟــﻤــﺘــﺎﺣــﻒ وﻛــﺬﻟــﻚ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻮاﻗﻊ اﻷﺛﺮﻳﺔ واﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺨﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻘﺪر اﻹﻣﻜﺎن ﻟﺰﻳﺎرات‬ ‫اﻟﺴﺎﺋﺤﻴﻦ‪ .‬وﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ أﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺸﺠﻴﻊ‬ ‫إﻃﻼع اﻟﺠﻤﻬﻮر ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﻤﺘﻠﻜﺎت‬ ‫اﻟﺜﻘﺎﻓﻴﺔ واﻷﺑﻨﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺨﻴﺔ ذات‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ اﺣﺘﺮام ﺣﻘﻮق‬ ‫ﻣﺎﻟﻜﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬وﻛﺬﻟﻚ اﻟﻤﺒﺎﻧﻲ اﻟﺪﻳﻨﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫دون إﺧﻼل ﺑﺎﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎت اﻟﻌﺎدﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻌﺒﺎدة ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (3‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﻤﻮارد اﻟﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟــﻨــﺎﺗــﺠــﺔ ﻋــﻦ زﻳــــﺎرة اﻟــﻤــﻮاﻗــﻊ‬ ‫اﻟﺜﻘﺎﻓﻴﺔ واﻷﺑﻨﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺨﻴﺔ‪ ،‬أو‬ ‫ﺟﺰء ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻷﻗــﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﻔﻆ‬ ‫وﺻـــﻮن وﺗــﻨــﻤــﻴــﺔ وﺗــﺰﻳــﻴــﻦ ﻫــﺬا‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺮاث‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (4‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ أن ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ اﻟﻨﺸﺎط‬ ‫اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻲ ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮب ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎت‬ ‫اﻟــﺜــﻘــﺎﻓــﻴــﺔ واﻟـــﺤـــﺮف واﻟــﺘــﺮاث‬ ‫اﻟﺸﻌﺒﻲ ﺑﺄن ﺗﺒﻘﻰ وﺗﺰدﻫﺮ ﺑﺪﻻ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ أن ﻳــﺆدي ﺑﻬﺎ إﻟــﻰ اﻟﺘﺪﻫﻮر‬ ‫واﻻﺑﺘﺬال‪.‬‬

‫‪ (1‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ أن ﻳﺸﺎرك اﻟﺴﻜﺎن اﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﻮن‬ ‫ﻓﻲ اﻷﻧﺸﻄﺔ اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ وﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﻨﺎﻓﻊ‬ ‫اﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎدﻳﺔ واﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ واﻟﺜﻘﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻨﺎﺟﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺧﺼﻮﺻﺎ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﺪه‬ ‫ﻣــﻦ ﻓـــﺮص ﻋــﻤــﻞ ﻣــﺒــﺎﺷــﺮة وﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮة‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (2‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﺎت اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺑــﺄﺳــﻠــﻮب ﻳﺴﻬﻢ ﻓــﻲ رﻓــﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﺸﺔ ﺳــﻜــﺎن اﻷﻗــﺎﻟــﻴــﻢ اﻟﻤﻀﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫وﻳﻠﺒﻲ اﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺗﻬﻢ‪ ،‬وﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ أن‬ ‫ﻳﻬﺪف اﻟﻨﻬﺞ اﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻄﻲ واﻟﻤﻌﻤﺎري‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺠﻌﺎت اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ وأﻣﺎﻛﻦ اﻹﻗﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫وأﺳﻠﻮب ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ إﻟﻰ دﻣﺠﻬﺎ ﺑﻘﺪر‬ ‫اﻹﻣــﻜــﺎن ﻓــﻲ اﻟﻨﺴﻴﺞ اﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎدي‬ ‫واﻻﺟــﺘــﻤــﺎﻋــﻲ اﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ‪ ،‬وإﻋــﻄــﺎء‬ ‫اﻷوﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺴﺎوي اﻟﻤﻬﺎرات‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻘﻮى اﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ اﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (3‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻋﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺘﺮض اﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ اﻟﺴﺎﺣﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫واﻟﺠﺰر واﻷﻗﺎﻟﻴﻢ اﻟﺮﻳﻔﻴﺔ واﻟﺠﺒﻠﻴﺔ ﺷﺪﻳﺪة‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺄﺛﺮ واﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺜﻞ اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﺮﺻﺔ ﻧﺎدرة ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮاﺟﻬﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﺺ‬ ‫اﻟﻨﺸﺎﻃﺎت اﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎدﻳﺔ اﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (4‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺘﻐﻠﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺳﻴﻤﺎ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻬﻢ‪ ،‬اﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﻳﺨﻀﻌﻮن‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻘﻮاﻧﻴﻦ اﻟــﺼــﺎدرة ﻋــﻦ اﻟﺴﻠﻄﺎت‬ ‫اﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‪ ،‬أن ﻳﻘﻮﻣﻮا ﺑﺈﺟﺮاء دراﺳﺎت‬ ‫ﻋﻦ أﺛــﺮ ﻣﺸﺎرﻳﻌﻬﻢ اﻟﺘﻨﻤﻮﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫اﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ وﻣﺤﻴﻄﻬﺎ اﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻬﻢ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت واﺿﺤﺔ وﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﺑﺮاﻣﺠﻬﻢ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﺔ‪ ،‬وﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮاﺗﻬﺎ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ‪ ،‬وﺗﻌﻤﻴﻖ اﻟﺤﻮار ﻣﻊ اﻟﺴﻜﺎن‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﻴﻦ ﺣﻮل ﻣﻀﻤﻮن ﻫﺬه اﻟﺒﺮاﻣﺞ‪.‬‬

‫اﻟﻤﺎدة اﻟﺴﺎدﺳﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺰاﻣﺎت أﺻﺤﺎب اﻟﻤﺼﻠﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ اﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ (1‬ﻳﻠﺘﺰم اﻟﻤﺸﺘﻐﻠﻮن ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣــﻌــﻠــﻮﻣــﺎت ﻣــﻮﺿــﻮﻋــﻴــﺔ وﺻــﺎدﻗــﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺴﺎﺋﺤﻴﻦ ﻋﻦ اﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻘﺼﺪوﻧﻬﺎ‬ ‫وﻋــﻦ ﻇــﺮوف ﺳﻔﺮﻫﻢ واﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻟﻬﻢ‬ ‫وإﻗﺎﻣﺘﻬﻢ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻟﻬﻢ اﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫أن ﺷــﺮوط اﻟﺘﻌﺎﻗﺪ اﻟﻤﻘﺘﺮﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫اﻟﻌﻤﻼء ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻣﺔ وواﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺒﻴﻌﺔ وأﺳﻌﺎر وﺟــﻮدة اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎت‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻠﺘﺰﻣﻮن ﺑﺘﻘﺪﻳﻤﻬﺎ‪ ،‬وﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺎﻟﻲ اﻟﺬي ﻳﺪﻓﻌﻮﻧﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻹﺧﻼل‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺎﻗﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻬﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (2‬ﻳﻠﺘﺰم اﻟﻤﺸﺘﻐﻠﻮن ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻃﺎﻟﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻗﻒ اﻷﻣــﺮ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﺒﺬل اﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫واﻟﺘﻌﺎون ﻣﻊ اﻟﺴﻠﻄﺎت اﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ أﺟﻞ‬ ‫أﻣﻦ وﺳﻼﻣﺔ اﻟﺴﺎﺋﺤﻴﻦ ووﻗﺎﻳﺘﻬﻢ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫اﻟﺤﻮادث وﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺻﺤﺘﻬﻢ وﺳﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻄﻌﺎم اﻟــﺬي ﻳﻘﺪم ﻟﻬﻢ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻬﻢ اﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ وﺟﻮد أﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻣﻴﻦ واﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪة‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ أن ﻋﻠﻴﻬﻢ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻮل اﻻﻟﺘﺰام ﺑﺎﻹﺑﻼغ اﻟــﺬي ﺗﻨﺺ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ اﻟﻘﻮاﻧﻴﻦ اﻟﻮﻃﻨﻴﺔ ودﻓﻊ اﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬ ‫اﻟﻌﺎدل ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪم اﻟﻮﻓﺎء ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺰاﻣﺎﺗﻬﻢ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻌﺎﻗﺪﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (3‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺘﻐﻠﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻃﺎﻟﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻗﻒ اﻷﻣﺮ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﻢ‪ ،‬أن ﻳﺒﺬﻟﻮا ﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫وﺳﻌﻬﻢ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻫﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ إﺷﺒﺎع اﻟﺮﻏﺒﺎت‬ ‫اﻟﺜﻘﺎﻓﻴﺔ واﻟﺮوﺣﻴﺔ ﻟــﺪى اﻟﺴﺎﺋﺤﻴﻦ‬ ‫وإﺗــﺎﺣــﺔ اﻟــﻔــﺮﺻــﺔ ﻟــﻬــﻢ ﻟﻤﻤﺎرﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺷﻌﺎﺋﺮﻫﻢ اﻟﺪﻳﻨﻴﺔ أﺛﻨﺎء ﺳﻔﺮﻫﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (4‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻟﻠﺴﻠﻄﺎت اﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻟــﺪول‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺼﺪرة واﻟﺪول اﻟﻤﻀﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬وﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺎون‬ ‫ﻣﻊ اﻟﻤﻬﻨﻴﻴﻦ اﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﻴﻦ واﺗﺤﺎداﺗﻬﻢ‪،‬‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ وﺟــﻮد اﻵﻟﻴﺎت اﻟﻼزﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻹﻋﺎدة اﻟﺴﺎﺋﺤﻴﻦ إﻟﻰ ﺑﻼدﻫﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫إﻓﻼس اﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﻧﻈﻤﺖ ﺳﻔﺮﻫﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (5‬ﻟﻠﺤﻜﻮﻣﺎت اﻟﺤﻖ‪ ،‬وﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ واﺟﺐ‬ ‫إﻋـــﻼم ﻣﻮاﻃﻨﻴﻬﺎ )ﺧــﺼــﻮﺻــﺎ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫اﻷزﻣﺎت( ﺑﺎﻟﻈﺮوف اﻟﺼﻌﺒﺔ‪ ،‬أو ﺣﺘﻰ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺨﺎﻃﺮ اﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻣﻮاﺟﻬﺘﻬﺎ أﺛﻨﺎء‬ ‫ﺳﻔﺮﻫﻢ إﻟﻰ اﻟﺨﺎرج‪ .‬وﻟﻜﻦ ﺗﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺆوﻟﻴﺔ إﺻﺪار ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت‬ ‫دون ﻣﺒﺎﻟﻐﺔ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻻ ﻣﺒﺮر‬ ‫ﻟﻪ ﻳﻀﺮ ﺑﺼﻨﺎﻋﺔ اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺪول‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻀﻴﻔﺔ وﺑﻤﺼﺎﻟﺢ ﻣﻨﻈﻤﻲ اﻟﺮﺣﻼت‬ ‫ﻓﻲ اﻟﺪوﻟﺔ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﺬا ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﻗﺸﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﺤﻮى إرﺷــﺎدات اﻟﺴﻔﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺳﻠﻄﺎت‬ ‫اﻟﺪول اﻟﻤﻀﻴﻔﺔ واﻟﻤﻬﻨﻴﻴﻦ اﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﻴﻦ ﺑﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ إﺻﺪارﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﺎت‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻨﻬﺎ أن ﺗﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﻮرة اﻟﻤﻮﻗﻒ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ وأن ﺗﻘﺘﺼﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ اﻟﺠﻐﺮاﻓﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻔﺘﻘﺮ‬ ‫إﻟﻰ اﻷﻣﻦ ﻓﻌﻼ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ أو‬ ‫إﻟﻐﺎء ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬه اﻹرﺷﺎدات ﻓﻮر ﻋﻮدة‬ ‫اﻷﻣﻮر إﻟﻰ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (6‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﺤﺎﻓﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺳﻴﻤﺎ اﻟﺼﺤﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺘﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻓــﻲ ﺷـــﺆون اﻟﺴﻔﺮ‪،‬‬ ‫وﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ وﺳﺎﺋﻂ اﻹﻋﻼم‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫وﺳﺎﺋﻂ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل اﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻧﻴﺔ اﻟﺤﺪﻳﺜﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫أن ﺗﻨﺸﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﺻــﺎدﻗــﺔ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫اﻷﺣﺪاث واﻟﻤﻮاﻗﻒ اﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻓﻖ اﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬وﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ أﻳﻀﺎ‬ ‫أن ﺗﻘﺪم ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت دﻗﻴﻘﺔ وﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﻲ اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎت اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل‬ ‫واﻟــﺘــﺠــﺎرة اﻹﻟــﻜــﺘــﺮوﻧــﻴــﺔ اﻟﺤﺪﻳﺜﺔ‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪاﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ أﺟﻞ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻐﺮض‪،‬‬ ‫وﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ اﻟﺸﺄن‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻞ اﻹﻋﻼم‪ ،‬ﻋﺪم ﺗﺸﺠﻴﻊ‬ ‫اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ اﻟﺠﻨﺴﻴﺔ ﺑﺄي ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ‪.‬‬

‫اﻟﻤﺎدة اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺤﻖ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ (1‬ﻳﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺳﻜﺎن اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺪم‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺴﺎواة ﺑﺎﻟﺤﻖ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺘﻄﻠﻊ إﻟﻰ اﻛﺘﺸﺎف‬ ‫ﻣﻮارد ﻫﺬا اﻟﻜﻮﻛﺐ واﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮة وﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ؛ ﻛﻤﺎ أن‬

‫اﻟﻤﺸﺎرﻛﺔ اﻟﻤﻜﺜﻔﺔ واﻟﻤﺘﺰاﻳﺪة ﻓﻲ‬ ‫اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ اﻟﺪاﺧﻠﻴﺔ واﻟﺪوﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺪ أﺣﺪ‬ ‫أﻓﻀﻞ اﻟﻄﺮق اﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻔﺎدة ﻣﻦ‬ ‫اﻟﻨﻤﻮ اﻟﻤﻄﺮد ﻓﻲ أوﻗﺎت اﻟﻔﺮاغ‪ ،‬وﻻ‬ ‫ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ وﺿﻊ اﻟﻤﻌﻮﻗﺎت أﻣﺎﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (2‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ اﻟﻨﻈﺮ إﻟــﻰ ﺣﻖ اﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎره ﻣﻼزﻣﺎ ﻟﻠﺤﻖ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫اﻟﺮاﺣﺔ واﻟﺘﺮﻓﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺸﻤﻠﻪ ذﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫وﺿﻊ ﺣﺪ ﻣﻌﻘﻮل ﻟﻌﺪد ﺳﺎﻋﺎت اﻟﻌﻤﻞ‪،‬‬ ‫واﻟﺤﻖ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺤﺼﻮل ﻋﻠﻰ إﺟــﺎزات‬ ‫دورﻳﺔ ﻣﺪﻓﻮﻋﺔ اﻷﺟﺮ‪ ،‬وﻫﻮ ﻣﺎ ﻧﺼﺖ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ اﻟﻤﺎدة ‪ 24‬ﻣﻦ اﻹﻋﻼن اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﺤﻘﻮق اﻹﻧﺴﺎن‪ ،‬واﻟﻤﺎدة )‪ – 7‬د(‬ ‫ﻣﻦ اﻟﻌﻬﺪ اﻟﺪوﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﺤﻘﻮق اﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎدﻳﺔ‬ ‫واﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ واﻟﺜﻘﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (3‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ أن ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ اﻟﺴﻠﻄﺎت اﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ اﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺳﻴﻤﺎ‬ ‫اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ اﻟﺠﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﻬﻞ ﺑﺪرﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮة ﻣﻦ إﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﺮﻓﻴﻪ واﻟﺴﻔﺮ‬ ‫واﻻﻧﺘﻔﺎع ﻣﻦ اﻹﺟﺎزات‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (4‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺗﺸﺠﻴﻊ وﺗﺴﻬﻴﻞ اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ اﻟﻌﺎﺋﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫وﺳﻴﺎﺣﺔ اﻟﺸﺒﺎب واﻟﻄﻠﺒﺔ وﻛﺒﺎر اﻟﺴﻦ‪،‬‬ ‫وﺳﻴﺎﺣﺔ اﻟﻤﻌﺎﻗﻴﻦ‪.‬‬

‫اﻟﻤﺎدة اﻟﺜﺎﻣﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻳﺔ ﺗﻨﻘﻞ اﻟﺴﻴﺎح‪:‬‬ ‫‪ (1‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ أن ﻳﺘﻤﺘﻊ اﻟﺴﺎﺋﺤﻮن واﻟﺰاﺋﺮون‪،‬‬ ‫وﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻘﻮاﻋﺪ اﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮن اﻟﺪوﻟﻲ واﻟﺘﺸﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫اﻟﻮﻃﻨﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﺮﻳﺔ اﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ داﺧﻞ أوﻃﺎﻧﻬﻢ‬ ‫وﻣﻦ دوﻟﺔ إﻟﻰ أﺧﺮى‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻼ ﺑﻤﺎ ﺗﻨﺺ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ اﻟﻤﺎدة ‪ 13‬ﻣﻦ اﻹﻋﻼن اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﺤﻘﻮق اﻹﻧﺴﺎن‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ أن ﻳﺴﻤﺢ‬ ‫ﻟﻬﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮل إﻟــﻰ أﻣﺎﻛﻦ اﻟﻌﺒﻮر‬ ‫واﻹﻗﺎﻣﺔ‪ ،‬وﺑﻠﻮغ اﻟﻤﻮاﻗﻊ اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ‬ ‫واﻟﺜﻘﺎﻓﻴﺔ دون ﺗﻌﺮض ﻹﺟــﺮاءات‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻟﻎ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ودون ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (2‬ﻳﺤﻖ ﻟﻠﺴﺎﺋﺤﻴﻦ واﻟﺰاﺋﺮﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام‬ ‫أي ﻣﻦ وﺳﺎﺋﻞ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل اﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺳﻮاء‬

‫ﻛﺎﻧﺖ داﺧﻠﻴﺔ أو ﺧﺎرﺟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬وﻛﺬﻟﻚ‬ ‫اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻞ اﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ واﻟﻤﻴﺴﺮة ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮل‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎت اﻹدارﻳﺔ اﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ أن ﺗﻜﻔﻞ ﻟﻬﻢ ﺣﺮﻳﺔ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻤﺜﻠﻴﻦ اﻟﻘﻨﺼﻠﻴﻴﻦ ﻟﺒﻠﺪاﻧﻬﻢ وﻓﻘﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﻼﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺎت اﻟﺪﺑﻠﻮﻣﺎﺳﻴﺔ اﻟﺴﺎرﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (3‬ﻳﺤﻖ ﻟﻠﺴﺎﺋﺤﻴﻦ واﻟﺰاﺋﺮﻳﻦ اﻟﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ‬ ‫اﻟﺤﻘﻮق اﻟﻤﻘﺮرة ﻟﻤﻮاﻃﻨﻲ اﻟﺪوﻟﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﺰوروﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺴﺮﻳﺔ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت‬ ‫اﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ واﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﻬﻢ‪،‬‬ ‫وﺑﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻫﺬه‬ ‫اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت إﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻧﻴﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (4‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ أن ﺗﺘﻤﺸﻰ اﻹﺟﺮاءات اﻹدارﻳﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﻌﺒﻮر اﻟﺤﺪود‪ ،‬ﺳﻮاء ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫اﺧﺘﺼﺎص اﻟﺪوﻟﺔ أو ﻧﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﻋﻦ اﺗﻔﺎﻗﺎت‬ ‫دوﻟﻴﺔ – ﻣﺜﻞ اﻟﺘﺄﺷﻴﺮات أو اﻹﺟﺮاءات‬ ‫اﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ واﻟﺠﻤﺮﻛﻴﺔ ‪ -‬ﺑﻘﺪر اﻹﻣﻜﺎن‬ ‫ﻣﻊ اﻟﺴﻌﻲ إﻟــﻰ ﻛﻔﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺮﻳﺔ اﻟﺴﻔﺮ‬ ‫واﻻﻧﺘﻔﺎع ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ اﻟﺪوﻟﻴﺔ إﻟﻰ أﻗﺼﻰ‬ ‫ﺣﺪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺗﺸﺠﻴﻊ اﻻﺗﻔﺎﻗﺎت‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﺮم ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎت اﻟــﺪول‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺒﺴﻴﻂ ﺗﻠﻚ اﻹﺟـــﺮاءات واﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬واﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﺪرﻳﺠﻴﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ إﻟﻐﺎء‬ ‫أو ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ اﻟﻀﺮاﺋﺐ واﻟﺮﺳﻮم اﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮق ﺻﻨﺎﻋﺔ اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ وﺗﻀﺮ ﺑﻘﺪرﺗﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﻨﺎﻓﺴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (5‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ أن ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻓﺮﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺼﻮل‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺎت ﻣﺎﻟﻴـﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻌﻤﻼت‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ واﻟﻼزﻣﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﺎرﻫﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﺎ دام اﻟﻮﺿﻊ اﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎدي ﻟﺪوﻟﻬﻢ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ‪.‬‬

‫اﻟﻤﺎدة اﻟﺘﺎﺳﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﻘﻮق اﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﻴﻦ واﻟﻤﻘﺎوﻟﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﺔ اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ (1‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺿﻤﺎن اﻟﺤﻘﻮق اﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻌﺎﻣﻠﻴﻦ ﺑﺄﺟﺮ واﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﻴﻦ ﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﻬﻢ‬

‫اﻟــﺨــﺎص ﻓــﻲ ﺻــﻨــﺎﻋــﺔ اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ‬ ‫واﻟﻨﺸﺎﻃﺎت اﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ ،‬وذﻟﻚ ﺗﺤﺖ‬ ‫إﺷﺮاف اﻟﺴﻠﻄﺎت اﻟﻮﻃﻨﻴﺔ واﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ دول اﻟﻤﻨﺸﺄ واﻟﺪول اﻟﻤﻀﻴﻔﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻋﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻧﻈﺮا‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻌﻘﺒﺎت اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ اﻟﻨﺎﺟﻤﺔ ﻋﻦ اﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻮﺳﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻨﺸﺎﻃﻬﻢ واﻟﺒﻌﺪ اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﺘﻬﻢ‪ ،‬واﻟﻤﺮوﻧﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻌﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻬﻢ ﻓﻲ أﻏﻠﺐ اﻷﺣــﻮال ﻣﺮاﻋﺎﺗﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺤﻜﻢ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻬﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (2‬ﻟﻠﻌﺎﻣﻠﻴﻦ ﺑﺄﺟﺮ واﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﻴﻦ ﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﻬﻢ‬ ‫اﻟــﺨــﺎص ﻓــﻲ ﺻــﻨــﺎﻋــﺔ اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ‬ ‫واﻟﻨﺸﺎﻃﺎت اﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ اﻟﺤﻖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻞ‬ ‫اﻟﻮاﺟﺐ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ اﻟﺤﺼﻮل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺪرﻳﺐ‬ ‫أوﻟــﻲ وﺗــﺪرﻳــﺐ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﻴﻦ‪،‬‬ ‫وﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ أن ﻳﺤﺼﻠﻮا ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫اﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ اﻟﺤﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ اﻧﻌﺪام اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺮار اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻲ ﺑﻘﺪر‬ ‫اﻹﻣﻜﺎن‪ ،‬وﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ إﻋﻄﺎء وﺿﻊ ﺧﺎص‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻌﻤﺎل اﻟﻤﻮﺳﻤﻴﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻘﻄﺎع ﻳﺴﻤﺢ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻋﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻟﺮﻋﺎﻳﺘﻬﻢ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫اﻟﻨﺎﺣﻴﺔ اﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (3‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ اﻟﺴﻤﺎح ﻷي ﺷﺨﺺ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ أو‬ ‫اﻋﺘﺒﺎري‪ ،‬ﻟﺪﻳﻪ اﻹﻣﻜﺎﻧﺎت واﻟﻤﻬﺎرات‬ ‫اﻟــﻀــﺮورﻳــﺔ‪ ،‬اﻟﻘﻴﺎم ﺑﻨﺸﺎط ﻣﻬﻨﻲ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﺎل اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ وﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻮاﻧﻴﻦ‬ ‫اﻟﻮﻃﻨﻴﺔ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬وﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ أن ﻳﺴﻤﺢ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﻘﺎوﻟﻴﻦ واﻟﻤﺴﺘﺜﻤﺮﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺳﻴﻤﺎ‬ ‫اﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﻳﻌﻤﻠﻮن ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﺎل اﻟﻤﺸﺎرﻳﻊ‬ ‫اﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮة وﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ اﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮل‬ ‫اﻟﻲ اﻟﻘﻄﺎع اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﺄﻗﻞ ﻗﺪر ﻣﻦ‬ ‫اﻟﻘﻴﻮد اﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ أو اﻹدارﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (4‬ﺗــﺴــﻬــﻢ ﻋــﻤــﻠــﻴــﺎت ﺗــﺒــﺎدل اﻟــﺨــﺒــﺮة‬ ‫ﻟﻺدارﻳﻴﻦ واﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺒﻠﺪان‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮاء ﻛﺎﻧﻮا ﻳﻌﻤﻠﻮن ﺑﺄﺟﺮ‬ ‫أم ﻻ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ دﻋﻢ ﺗﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﺔ اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻢ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬا ﻣﻦ اﻟﻀﺮوري ﺗﻴﺴﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺑﻘﺪر اﻹﻣﻜﺎن ﻓﻲ‬ ‫إﻃﺎر اﻟﻘﻮاﻧﻴﻦ اﻟﻮﻃﻨﻴﺔ واﻻﺗﻔﺎﻗﺎت‬ ‫اﻟﺪوﻟﻴﺔ اﻟﻤﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (5‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﻛﺎت اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة‬ ‫اﻟﺠﻨﺴﻴﺎت أﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﻞ ﻣﺮاﻛﺰ اﻟﻘﻮة‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ أﺣﻴﺎﻧﺎ‪ ،‬وذﻟﻚ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻘﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻀﺎﻣﻦ اﻟﻼزم ﻟﺘﻄﻮﻳﺮ اﻟﻤﺒﺎدﻻت‬ ‫اﻟﺪوﻟﻴﺔ وﻧﻤﻮﻫﺎ اﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ؛ وﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﻚ‬

‫اﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎت أن ﺗﺘﺠﻨﺐ اﻟﺘﺤﻮل إﻟﻰ أدوات‬ ‫ﻟﻨﻘﻞ اﻟﻨﻤﺎذج اﻟﺜﻘﺎﻓﻴﺔ واﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻔﺮض ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻣﺼﻄﻨﻌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺠﺘﻤﻌﺎت اﻟﻤﻀﻴﻔﺔ‪ .‬وﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺮﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎر‬ ‫واﻟﺘﺠﺎرة‪ ،‬أن ﺗﺸﺎرك ﻓﻲ اﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬واﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪم ﺗﻘﻠﻴﺺ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﻫﻤﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ اﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎد اﻟــﺬي ﺗﻘﻮم‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻪ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ اﻟﻤﺒﺎﻟﻐﺔ ﻓﻲ اﺳﺘﻌﺎدة‬ ‫أرﺑﺎﺣﻬﺎ إﻟﻰ ﺑﻠﺪاﻧﻬﺎ اﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ أو ﻓﻲ‬ ‫اﻻﺳﺘﻴﺮاد ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (6‬إن اﻟــﺸــﺮاﻛــﺔ وإﻗـــﺎﻣـــﺔ ﻋــﻼﻗــﺎت‬ ‫ﻣــﺘــﻮازﻧــﺔ ﺑــﻴــﻦ ﻣــﺸــﺎرﻳــﻊ اﻟـــﺪول‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻮﻟﺪة واﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﺔ ﻳﺴﻬﻢ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺴﺘﺪاﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ وﻓــﻲ ﺗﻮزﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺎﻓﻊ ﻧﻤﻮﻫﺎ ﺗﻮزﻳﻌﺎ ﻋﺎدﻻ‪.‬‬

‫اﻟﻤﺎدة اﻟﻌﺎﺷﺮة‬ ‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺒﺎدئ اﻟﻤﺪوﻧﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻴﺔ ﻵداب اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ (1‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻷﺻﺤﺎب اﻟﻤﺼﻠﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮاء ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﻄﺎع اﻟﻌﺎم أو‬ ‫اﻟﻘﻄﺎع اﻟﺨﺎص‪ ،‬اﻟﺘﻌﺎون ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻌﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﻬﺬه اﻟﻤﺒﺎدئ وﻣﺮاﻗﺒﺔ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ اﻟﻔﻌﺎل‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (2‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻷﺻﺤﺎب اﻟﻤﺼﻠﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ اﻻﻋﺘﺮاف ﺑﺪور اﻟﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎت‬ ‫اﻟﺪوﻟﻴﺔ وﻋﻠﻰ رأﺳﻬﺎ ﻣﻨﻈﻤﺔ اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬وﻛﺬﻟﻚ اﻟﻤﻨﻈﻤﺎت ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫اﻟﺤﻜﻮﻣﻴﺔ ذات اﻟﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮوﻳﺞ‬ ‫واﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻴﻴﻦ وﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺣﻘﻮق‬ ‫اﻹﻧﺴﺎن واﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ واﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺮاﻋﺎة‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺒﺎدئ اﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﻧﻮن اﻟﺪوﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (3‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻷﺻﺤﺎب اﻟﻤﺼﺎﻟﺢ اﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮرﻳﻦ‬ ‫أن ﻳﺒﺮﻫﻨﻮا ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺰﻣﻬﻢ إﺣﺎﻟﺔ أﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺎزﻋﺎت ﺗﻨﺸﺄ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ أو ﺗﻔﺴﻴﺮ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺪوﻧﺔ اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻴﺔ ﻵداب اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ إﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻫﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﻳﺪة ﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﻓﻲ ”اﻟﻠﺠﻨﺔ اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻵداب اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﺔ“ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﻓﻴﻖ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﻢ‪.‬‬

Mje. EPS's A?RABE 2010:Maquetaci贸n 1

22/2/10

09:50

P谩gina 8

The Millennium Development Goals Report 2011

asdf

UNITED NATIONS

This report is based on a master set of data that has been compiled by an Inter-Agency and Expert Group on MDG Indicators led by the Department of Economic and Social Affairs of the United Nations Secretariat, in response to the wishes of the General Assembly for periodic assessment of progress towards the MDGs. The Group comprises representatives of the international organizations whose activities include the preparation of one or more of the series of statistical indicators that were identified as appropriate for monitoring progress towards the MDGs, as reflected in the list below. A number of national statisticians and outside expert advisers also contributed.

INTERNATIONAL LABOUR ORGANIZATION FOOD AND AGRICULTURE ORGANIZATION OF THE UNITED NATIONS UNITED NATIONS EDUCATIONAL, SCIENTIFIC AND CULTURAL ORGANIZATION

Cover Inside UNITED NATIONS INDUSTRIAL DEVELOPMENT ORGANIZATION WORLD HEALTH ORGANIZATION THE WORLD BANK INTERNATIONAL MONETARY FUND INTERNATIONAL TELECOMMUNICATION UNION ECONOMIC COMMISSION FOR AFRICA ECONOMIC COMMISSION FOR EUROPE ECONOMIC COMMISSION FOR LATIN AMERICA AND THE CARIBBEAN ECONOMIC AND SOCIAL COMMISSION FOR ASIA AND THE PACIFIC ECONOMIC AND SOCIAL COMMISSION FOR WESTERN ASIA JOINT UNITED NATIONS PROGRAMME ON HIV/AIDS UNITED NATIONS CHILDREN’S FUND UNITED NATIONS CONFERENCE ON TRADE AND DEVELOPMENT UNITED NATIONS DEVELOPMENT FUND FOR WOMEN UNITED NATIONS DEVELOPMENT PROGRAMME UNITED NATIONS ENVIRONMENT PROGRAMME UNITED NATIONS FRAMEWORK CONVENTION ON CLIMATE CHANGE UNITED NATIONS HIGH COMMISSIONER FOR REFUGEES UNITED NATIONS HUMAN SETTLEMENTS PROGRAMME UNITED NATIONS POPULATION FUND INTERNATIONAL TRADE CENTRE INTER-PARLIAMENTARY UNION ORGANISATION FOR ECONOMIC CO-OPERATION AND DEVELOPMENT WORLD TRADE ORGANIZATION

The Millennium Development Goals Report 2011

asdf United Nations New York, 2011

Foreword | 3

Foreword Since they were first adopted, the Millennium Development Goals (MDGs) have raised awareness and shaped a broad vision that remains the overarching framework for the development activities of the United Nations. At the September 2010 MDG Summit, world leaders put forward an ambitious action plan — a roadmap outlining what is needed to meet the goals by the agreed deadline of 2015. The information presented on the following pages demonstrates that this can be done if concrete steps are taken. Already, the MDGs have helped to lift millions of people out of poverty, save lives and ensure that children attend school. They have reduced maternal deaths, expanded opportunities for women, increased access to clean water and freed many people from deadly and debilitating disease. At the same time, the report shows that we still have a long way to go in empowering women and girls, promoting sustainable development, and protecting the most vulnerable from the devastating effects of multiple crises, be they conflicts, natural disasters or volatility in prices for food and energy. Progress tends to bypass those who are lowest on the economic ladder or are otherwise disadvantaged because of their sex, age, disability or ethnicity.

Disparities between urban and rural areas are also pronounced and daunting. Achieving the goals will require equitable and inclusive economic growth — growth that reaches everyone and that will enable all people, especially the poor and marginalized, to benefit from economic opportunities. We must also take more determined steps to protect the ecosystems that support economic growth and sustain life on earth. Next year’s United Nations Conference on Sustainable Development — Rio + 20 — is an opportunity to generate momentum in this direction, which is vital for achieving the MDGs. Between now and 2015, we must make sure that promises made become promises kept. The people of the world are watching. Too many of them are anxious, angry and hurting. They fear for their jobs, their families, their futures. World leaders must show not only that they care, but that they have the courage and conviction to act.

Ban Ki-moon Secretary-General, United Nations

4 | The Millennium Development Goals Report 2011

Overview Lives have been saved or changed for the better More than 10 years have passed since world leaders established goals and targets to free humanity from extreme poverty, hunger, illiteracy and disease. The Millennium Declaration and the MDG framework for accountability derived from it have inspired development efforts and helped set global and national priorities and focus subsequent actions. While more work lies ahead, the world has cause to celebrate, in part due to the continued economic growth of some developing countries and targeted interventions in critical areas. Increased funding from many sources has translated into the expansion of programmes to deliver services and resources to those most in need. Here are some of the highlights: •• Poverty continues to decline in many countries and regions Despite significant setbacks after the 2008-2009 economic downturn, exacerbated by the food and energy crisis, the world is still on track to reach the poverty-reduction target. By 2015, it is now expected that the global poverty rate will fall below 15 per cent, well under the 23 per cent target. This global trend, however, mainly reflects rapid growth in Eastern Asia, especially China. •• Some of the poorest countries have made the greatest strides in education Burundi, Madagascar, Rwanda, Samoa, Sao Tome and Principe, Togo and the United Republic of Tanzania have achieved or are nearing the goal of universal primary education. Considerable progress has also been made in Benin, Bhutan, Burkina Faso, Ethiopia, Guinea, Mali, Mozambique and Niger, where net enrolment ratios in primary school increased by more than 25 percentage points from 1999 to 2009. With an 18 percentage point gain between 1999 and 2009, sub-Saharan Africa is the region with the best record of improvement. •• Targeted interventions have succeeded in reducing child mortality The number of deaths of children under the age of five declined from 12.4 million in 1990 to 8.1 million in 2009. This means that nearly 12,000 fewer children are dying each day. Between 2000 and 2008, the combination of improved immunization coverage and the opportunity for second-dose immunizations led to a 78 per cent drop in measles deaths worldwide. These averted deaths represent one quarter of the decline in mortality from all causes among children under five.

from malaria have been reduced by 20 per cent worldwide— from nearly 985,000 in 2000 to 781,000 in 2009. This was accomplished through critical interventions, including the distribution of insecticide-treated mosquito nets, which, in sub-Saharan Africa alone, are sufficient to cover 76 per cent of the population at risk. The largest absolute drops in malaria deaths were in Africa, where 11 countries have reduced malaria cases and deaths by over 50 per cent. •• Investments in preventing and treating HIV are yielding results New HIV infections are declining steadily, led by sub-Saharan Africa. In 2009, an estimated 2.6 million people were newly infected with HIV—a drop of 21 per cent since 1997, when new infections peaked. Thanks to increased funding and the expansion of major programmes, the number of people receiving antiretroviral therapy for HIV or AIDS increased 13fold from 2004 to 2009. By end-2009, 5.25 million people were receiving such treatment in low- and middle-income countries—an increase of over 1.2 million people since December 2008. As a result, the number of AIDS-related deaths declined by 19 per cent over the same period. •• Effective strategies against tuberculosis are saving millions of lives Between 1995 and 2009, a total of 41 million tuberculosis patients were successfully treated and up to 6 million lives were saved, due to effective international protocols for the treatment of tuberculosis. Worldwide, deaths attributed to the disease have fallen by more than one third since 1990. •• Every region has made progress in improving access to clean drinking water An estimated 1.1 billion people in urban areas and 723 million people in rural areas gained access to an improved drinking water source over the period 1990-2008. Eastern Asia registered the largest gains in drinking water coverage— from 69 per cent in 1990 to 86 per cent in 2008. SubSaharan Africa nearly doubled the number of people using an improved drinking water source—from 252 million in 1990 to 492 million in 2008.

Despite real progress, we are failing to reach the most vulnerable Alhough many countries have demonstrated that progress is possible, efforts need to be intensified. They must also target the hardest to reach: the poorest of the poor and those disadvantaged because of their sex, age, ethnicity or disability. Disparities in progress between urban and rural areas remain daunting.

•• Increased funding and control efforts have cut deaths from malaria

•• The poorest children have made the slowest progress in terms of improved nutrition

Through the hard work of governments, international partners, community health workers and civil society, deaths

In 2009, nearly a quarter of children in the developing world were underweight, with the poorest children most

Overview | 5

affected. In Southern Asia, a shortage of quality food and poor feeding practices, combined with inadequate sanitation, has contributed to making underweight prevalence among children the highest in the world. In that region, between 1995 and 2009, no meaningful improvement was seen among children in the poorest households, while underweight prevalence among children from the richest 20 per cent of households decreased by almost one third. Children living in rural areas of developing regions are twice as likely to be underweight as are their urban counterparts. •• Opportunities for full and productive employment remain particularly slim for women Wide gaps remain in women’s access to paid work in at least half of all regions. Following significant job losses in 2008-2009, the growth in employment during the economic recovery in 2010, especially in the developing world, was lower for women than for men. Women employed in manufacturing industries were especially hard hit. •• Being poor, female or living in a conflict zone increases the probability that a child will be out of school The net enrolment ratio of children in primary school has only gone up by 7 percentage points since 1999, reaching 89 per cent in 2009. More recently, progress has actually slowed, dimming prospects for reaching the MDG target of universal primary education by 2015. Children from the poorest households, those living in rural areas and girls are the most likely to be out of school. Worldwide, among children of primary school age not enrolled in school, 42 per cent— 28 million—live in poor countries affected by conflict.

is 1.8 times more likely to use an improved drinking water source than a person living in a rural area.

Continued progress requires an active commitment to peace, equity, equality and sustainability At the 2010 High-level Plenary Meeting of the General Assembly on the Millennium Development Goals, world leaders reaffirmed their commitment to the MDGs and called for intensified collective action and the expansion of successful approaches. They acknowledged the challenges posed by multiple crises, increasing inequalities and persistent violent conflicts. They called for action to ensure equal access by women and girls to education, basic services, health care, economic opportunities and decision-making at all levels, recognizing that achievement of the MDGs depends largely on women’s empowerment. World leaders also stressed that accelerated action on the goals requires economic growth that is sustainable, inclusive and equitable—growth that enables everyone to benefit from progress and share in economic opportunities. Finally, further and faster movement towards achievement of the MDGs will require a rejuvenated global partnership, expeditious delivery on commitments already made, and an agile transition to a more environmentally sustainable future.

•• Advances in sanitation often bypass the poor and those living in rural areas Over 2.6 billion people still lack access to flush toilets or other forms of improved sanitation. And where progress has occurred, it has largely bypassed the poor. An analysis of trends over the period 1995-2008 for three countries in Southern Asia shows that improvements in sanitation disproportionately benefited the better off, while sanitation coverage for the poorest 40 per cent of households hardly increased. Although gaps in sanitation coverage between urban and rural areas are narrowing, rural populations remain at a distinct disadvantage in a number of regions. •• Improving the lives of a growing number of urban poor remains a monumental challenge Progress in ameliorating slum conditions has not been sufficient to offset the growth of informal settlements throughout the developing world. In developing regions, the number of urban residents living in slum conditions is now estimated at 828 million, compared to 657 million in 1990 and 767 million in 2000. Redoubled efforts will be needed to improve the lives of the urban poor in cities and metropolises across the developing world. •• Progress has been uneven in improving access to safe drinking water In all regions, coverage in rural areas lags behind that of cities and towns. In sub-Saharan Africa, an urban dweller

Sha Zukang Under-Secretary-General for Economic and Social Affairs

6â&#x20AC;&#x192; |â&#x20AC;&#x192; The Millennium Development Goals Report 2011

Target

Goal 1 Eradicate extreme poverty and hunger

Halve, between 1990 and 2015, the proportion of people whose income is less than $1 a day

Sustained growth in developing countries, particularly in Asia, is keeping the world on track to meet the poverty-reduction target Proportion of people living on less than $1.25 a day, 1990 and 2005 (Percentage) Sub-Saharan Africa 58 51 Southern Asia 49 39 Southern Asia (excluding India) 45 31 Caribbean 29 26 Caucasus & Central Asia 6 19 South-Eastern Asia 39 19 Eastern Asia 60 16 Latin America 11 7 Western Asia 2 6 Northern Africa 5 3 Developing regions 45 27 0

20 1990

2005

2015 target

Robust growth in the first half of the decade reduced the number of people in developing countries living on less than $1.25 a day from about 1.8 billion in 1990 to 1.4 billion in 2005. At the same time, the corresponding poverty rate dropped from 46 per cent to 27 per cent. The economic and financial crisis that began in the advanced countries of North America and Europe in 2008 sparked declines in commodity prices, trade and investment, resulting in slower growth globally.

Goal 1: Eradicate extreme poverty and hunger | 7

Despite these declines, current trends suggest that the momentum of growth in the developing world remains strong enough to sustain the progress needed to reach the global poverty-reduction target. Based on recently updated projections from the World Bank, the overall poverty rate is still expected to fall below 15 per cent by 2015, indicating that the Millennium Development Goal (MDG) target can be met. The World Bank’s new poverty projections for 2015 incorporate several changes: additional data from over 60 new household surveys, updates of historical consumption per capita from national accounts, and a new forecast of growth in per capita consumption. The forecast therefore captures changes in income distribution in countries for which new survey data are available, and assumes that inequality remains unchanged in other countries. It also incorporates some of the effects of the global economic crisis, such as food and fuel price shocks. By 2015, the number of people in developing countries living on less than $1.25 a day is projected to fall below 900 million. The fastest growth and sharpest reductions in poverty continue to be found in Eastern Asia, particularly in China, where the poverty rate is expected to fall to under 5 per cent by 2015. India has also contributed to the large reduction in global poverty. In that country, poverty rates are projected to fall from 51 per cent in 1990 to about 22 per cent in 2015. In China and India combined, the number of people living in extreme poverty between 1990 and 2005 declined by about 455 million, and an additional 320 million people are expected to join their ranks by 2015. Projections for sub-Saharan Africa are slightly more upbeat than previously estimated. Based on recent economic growth performance and forecasted trends, the extreme poverty rate in the region is expected to fall below 36 per cent. The task of monitoring progress on poverty reduction is beset by a lack of good quality surveys carried out at regular intervals, delays in reporting survey results, and insufficient documentation of countrylevel analytical methods used. It is also hampered by difficulties in accessing the underlying survey microdata required to compute the poverty estimates. These gaps remain particularly problematic in sub-Saharan Africa, where the data necessary to make comparisons over the full range of MDGs are available in less than half the countries. For example, between 2007 and 2009, the countries that had collected, analysed and disseminated survey data, represent only 20 per cent of the region’s population.

8â&#x20AC;&#x192; |â&#x20AC;&#x192; The Millennium Development Goals Report 2011

Target Achieve full and productive employment and decent work for all, including women and young people

Economic recovery has failed to translate into employment opportunities Employment-to-population ratio, 2000, 2009 and 2010 preliminary estimates

In the developed regions, the employment-topopulation ratio dropped from 56.8 per cent in 2007 to 55.4 per cent in 2009, with a further drop to 54.8 per cent in 2010. Clearly, many developed economies are simply not generating sufficient employment opportunities to absorb growth in the working-age population. Again, this reflects an ongoing lag between economic recovery and a recovery in employment in this region. This contrasts with many developing regions, some of which saw an initial decline in the employment-to-population ratio but where, with the exception of the Caucasus and Central Asia and Eastern Asia, the estimated employment-to-population ratio in 2010 has changed little since 2007.

Eastern Asia 74 70 70 Oceania 66 66 66 South-Eastern Asia 67 66 66 Sub-Saharan Africa 63 64 64 Latin America & the Caribbean 58 61 61 Caucasus & Central Asia 55 59 60 Southern Asia 57 58 58 Northern Africa 43 46 46 Western Asia 45 44 43 Developed regions 5 5.8 5 5.4 54.8 Developing regions 63.2 62.7 62.7 0

10 2000

30 2009

50 2010

More than three years have passed since the onset of the fastest and deepest drop in global economic activity since the Great Depression. While global economic growth is rebounding, the global labour market is, in many respects, behaving as anticipated in the middle of the crisis: stubbornly elevated unemployment and slow employment generation in developed economies, coupled with widespread deficits in decent work in even the fastest-growing developing countries.

Goal 1: Eradicate extreme poverty and hunger | 9

Progress in reducing vulnerable employment stalled following the economic crisis

is characterized by informal working arrangements, lack of adequate social protection, low pay and difficult working conditions.

Proportion of own-account and contributing family workers in total employment, 1999, 2008 and 2009 (Percentage) Oceania 77 78 78 Southern Asia 80 78 77 Sub-Saharan Africa 80 75 76 South-Eastern Asia 66 62 62 Eastern Asia 61 53 51 Caucasus & Central Asia 57 44 44 Northern Africa 33 33 33 Latin America & the Caribbean 36 32 32 Western Asia 37 28 29 Developed regions 11 10 10 Developing regions 65 60 60 0

10 1999

30 2008

2009

In developing regions overall, the majority of workers are engaged in “vulnerable employment”, defined as the percentage of own-account and unpaid family workers in total employment. Vulnerable employment

On the basis of available data, it is estimated that the vulnerable employment rate remained roughly the same between 2008 and 2009, both in developing and developed regions. This compares with a steady average decline in the years preceding the economic and financial crisis. Increases in the vulnerable employment rate were found in sub-Saharan Africa and Western Asia.

10â&#x20AC;&#x192; |â&#x20AC;&#x192; The Millennium Development Goals Report 2011

Worldwide, one in five workers and their families are living in extreme poverty Proportion of employed people living on less than $1.25 a day (Percentage) and number of working poor (Millions), 1999-2009 Millions 1000

Percentage 35.0 Working poor

800

30.0

600

25.0

400

20.0

200

Working poverty rate Pre-crisis trend (2002-2007)

15.0 1999

2000

2001

2002

2003

2004

2005

A slowdown in progress against poverty is reflected in the number of working poor. According to the International Labour Organization, one in five workers and their families worldwide were living in extreme poverty (on less than $1.25 per person per day) in 2009. This represents a sharp decline in poverty from a decade earlier, but also a flattening of the slope

2006

2007

2008

2009

of the working poverty incidence curve beginning in 2007. The estimated rate for 2009 is 1.6 percentage points higher than the rate projected on the basis of the pre-crisis trend. While this is a crude estimate, it amounts to about 40 million more working poor at the extreme $1.25 level in 2009 than would have been expected on the basis of pre-crisis trends.

Goal 1: Eradicate extreme poverty and hungerâ&#x20AC;&#x192; |â&#x20AC;&#x192;11

Target Halve, between 1990 and 2015, the proportion of people who suffer from hunger.

The proportion of people going hungry has plateaued at 16 per cent, despite reductions in poverty Number and proportion of people in the developing regions who are undernourished, 1990-1992, 1995-1997, 2000-2002 and 2005-2007 Percentage

Millions

1,500 20 1,200

18 16

818

837

900

15 828

600

770

300

19901992

19951997

Number of undernourished people

20002002

20052007

Percentage of undernourished people

The proportion of people in the developing world who went hungry in 2005-2007 remained stable at 16 per cent, despite significant reductions in extreme poverty. Based on this trend, and in light of the economic crisis and rising food prices, it will be difficult to meet the hunger-reduction target in many regions of the developing world. The disconnect between poverty reduction and the persistence of hunger has brought renewed attention to the mechanisms governing access to food in the developing world. This year, the Food and Agriculture Organization of the United Nations will undertake a comprehensive review of the causes behind this apparent discrepancy to better inform hunger-reduction policies in the future.

12â&#x20AC;&#x192; |â&#x20AC;&#x192; The Millennium Development Goals Report 2011

Disparities within and among regions are found in the fight against hunger Proportion of undernourished population, 2005-2007 (Percentage)

Very high (undernourishment 35% and above)

Moderately low (undernourishment 5-14%)

High (undernourishment 25-34%)

Very low (undernourishment below 5%)

Moderately high (undernourishment 15-24%)

Missing or insufficient data

Trends observed in South-Eastern Asia, Eastern Asia and Latin America and the Caribbean suggest that they are likely to meet the hunger-reduction target by 2015. However, wide disparities are found among countries in these regions. For example, the strong gains recorded

in Eastern Asia since 1990 are largely due to progress in China, while levels in South-Eastern Asia benefit from advances made in Indonesia and the Philippines. Based on current trends, sub-Saharan Africa will be unable to meet the hunger-reduction target by 2015.

Goal 1: Eradicate extreme poverty and hungerâ&#x20AC;&#x192; |â&#x20AC;&#x192;13

Nearly a quarter of children under five in the developing world remain undernourished

lack of quality food, suboptimal feeding practices, repeated attacks of infectious diseases and pervasive undernutrition. In Southern Asia, for example, one finds not only a shortage of quality food and poor feeding practices, but a lack of flush toilets and other forms of improved sanitation. Nearly half the population practises open defecation, resulting in repeated bouts of diarrhoeal disease in children, which contribute to the high prevalence of undernutrition. Moreover, more than a quarter of infants in that region weigh less than 2,500 grams at birth. Many of these children are never able to catch up in terms of their nutritional status. All these factors conspire to make underweight prevalence in the region the highest in the world.

Proportion of children under age five who are underweight, 1990 and 2009 (Percentage) Southern Asia 52 43 Sub-Saharan Africa 27 22 South-Eastern Asia 30 18 Western Asia* 11 7

Nutrition must be given higher priority in national development if the MDGs are to be achieved. A number of simple, cost-effective measures delivered at key stages of the life cycle, particularly from conception to two years after birth, could greatly reduce undernutrition. These measures include improved maternal nutrition and care, breastfeeding within one hour of birth, exclusive breastfeeding for the first 6 months of life, and timely, adequate, safe, and appropriate complementary feeding and micronutrient intake between 6 and 24 months of age. Urgent, accelerated and concerted actions are needed to deliver and scale up such interventions to achieve MDG 1 and other health-related goals.

Eastern Asia 15 6 15

Northern Africa 10 6

Caucasus & Central Asia 7 5 Latin America & the Caribbean 10 4 Developing regions 30 23 0

10 1990

20 2009

Target

* Regional aggregate only covers 47 per cent of the regional population, due to lack of data from Yemen. Note: Trend analysis is based on data from 64 countries covering 73 per cent of the under-five population in developing regions. Prevalence of underweight children is estimated according to World Health Organization (WHO) Child Growth Standards. For the Caucasus & Central Asia, the baseline for trend analysis is 1996, since there are not sufficient data for 1990.

In developing regions, the proportion of children under age five who are underweight declined from 30 per cent to 23 per cent between 1990 and 2009. Progress in reducing underweight prevalence was made in all regions where comparable trend data are available. Eastern Asia, Latin America and the Caribbean, and the Caucasus and Central Asia have reached or nearly reached the MDG target, and South-Eastern Asia and Northern Africa are on track. However, progress in the developing regions overall is insufficient to reach the target by 2015. Children are underweight due to a combination of factors:

14â&#x20AC;&#x192; |â&#x20AC;&#x192; The Millennium Development Goals Report 2011

In Southern Asia, progress in combating child undernutrition is bypassing the poorest Proportion of under-five children who are underweight in Southern Asia, by household wealth, around 1995 and 2009 (Percentage) 80 64

60 54

47 40

0 -5 -14

-20

-21

-21 -30

-40 Poorest 20%

Second 20%

Middle 20%

Fourth 20%

Richest 20%

Prevalence around 1995 Prevalence around 2009 Relative reduction between 1995 and 2009

Children from the poorest households are more likely to be underweight than their richer counterparts. Moreover, the poorest children are making the slowest progress in reducing underweight prevalence. In Southern Asia, for example, there was no meaningful improvement among children in the poorest households in the period between 1995 and 2009, while underweight prevalence among children from the richest 20 per cent of households decreased by almost a third. Children in developing regions are twice as likely to be underweight if they live in rural rather than urban areas. Little difference was found in underweight prevalence between girls and boys.

Goal 1: Eradicate extreme poverty and hunger | 15

Close to 43 million people worldwide are displaced because of conflict or persecution Number of refugees and internally displaced persons, 2000-2010 (Millions) 40

16.0

14.6

13.7

13.8

25.0

24.6

25.3

23.7

2001

2002

2003

2004

2005

15.9

13.0

16.0

15.2

15.4

24.4

26.0

27.1

27.5

2006

2007

2008

2009

2010

14.3

Refugees Internally displaced persons

21.2

2000

Humanitarian crises and conflicts continue to uproot millions of people across the globe. They also hinder the return of refugees and those internally displaced. As of end 2010, close to 43 million people worldwide were displaced due to conflict and persecution, the highest number since the mid-1990s and about half a million more than the previous year. Of these, 15.4 million are refugees, including 10.5 million who fall under the responsibility of the United Nations High Commissioner for Refugees (UNHCR) and 4.8 million Palestinian refugees who are the responsibility of the United Nations Relief and Works Agency for Palestine Refugees in the Near East (UNRWA). In addition, 27.5 million people have been uprooted by violence and persecution but remain within the borders of their own countries. While often not displaced per se, UNHCR estimated that some 12 million people were stateless. While millions of refugees have found a durable solution to their situation over the decades, others

have been confined to camps and other settlements for many years without any solution in sight. Excluding refugees under UNRWA’s mandate, UNHCR estimates that 7.2 million refugees spread across 24 countries are currently trapped in a protracted situation of this kind. This is the highest number since 2001 and clearly demonstrates the lack of permanent solutions for many of the world’s refugees. The number of refugees who have returned to their homes has continuously decreased since 2004, with the 2010 figures (197,600 returns) being the lowest since 1990. On average, four out of five refugees are hosted by developing countries. Afghans and Iraqis continue to be the largest refugee populations under the UNHCR mandate with 3 million and 1.7 million refugees, respectively, at the end of 2010. Together they account for nearly half of all refugees under UNHCR’s mandate.

16â&#x20AC;&#x192; |â&#x20AC;&#x192; The Millennium Development Goals Report 2011

Target

Goal 2 Achieve universal primary education

Ensure that, by 2015, children everywhere, boys and girls alike, will be able to complete a full course of primary schooling

Sub-Saharan Africa has the best record for improvement in primary school enrolment Adjusted net enrolment ratio in primary education,* 1998/1999 and 2008/2009 (Percentage) Sub-Saharan Africa 58 76 Western Asia 83 88 Southern Asia 79 91 Caucasus & Central Asia 94 93 Northern Africa 86 94 South-Eastern Asia 93 94 Latin America & the Caribbean 93 95 Eastern Asia 95 96 Developed regions 97 96 Developing regions 82 89 0

1999

100

2009

* Defined as the number of pupils of the theoretical school age for primary education enrolled either in primary or secondary school, expressed as a percentage of the total population in that age group. Note: Data for Oceania are not available.

In the developing world as a whole, enrolment in primary education has increased slowly. The net enrolment ratio has gone up by just 7 percentage points since 1999, reaching 89 per cent in 2009. In more recent years, progress has actually slowed, with an increase of just 2 percentage points between 2004 and 2009, dimming prospects for reaching the MDG target of universal primary education by 2015.

Goal 2: Achieve universal primary education | 17

Most regions have advanced somewhat, though progress varies considerably among geographical groupings. With an 18-percentage-point gain between 1999 and 2009, sub-Saharan Africa has the best record for improvement, followed by Southern Asia and Northern Africa, which had a 12-percentagepoint and an 8-percentage-point increase, respectively. By contrast, the net enrolment ratio fell from 94 per cent to 93 per cent in the Caucasus and Central Asia. To achieve universal primary education, children everywhere must complete a full cycle of primary schooling. Current statistics show that the world is far from meeting that goal. Only 87 out of 100 children in the developing regions complete primary education.1 In half of the least developed countries, at least two out of five children in primary school drop out before reaching the last grade.

Being poor, female or living in a conflict zone increases the probability that a child will be out of school Distribution of out-of-school children by region, 1999 and 2009 (Percentage) 100

Measured by the gross intake rate to the last grade of primary education.

In 2009, more than 20 per cent of primary-age children in least developed countries were excluded from education. Nevertheless, some of the poorest countries have made the greatest strides since 1999. Burundi, Madagascar, Rwanda, Samoa, Sao Tome and Principe, Togo and the United Republic of Tanzania have achieved or are nearing the goal of universal primary education (with an adjusted net enrolment ratio above 95 per cent). Considerable progress was also made in Benin, Bhutan, Burkina Faso, Ethiopia, Guinea, Mali, Mozambique and Niger, where net enrolment ratios increased by more than 25 percentage points from 1999 to 2009. The abolition of school fees is considered an important driver of rapid progress in many of these countries.

6 20

5 4

4 4 3 3 3 1999

2009

4 2 6

Sub-Saharan Africa Southern Asia Eastern Asia South-Eastern Asia Latin America & the Caribbean Western Asia Northern Africa Rest of the world

The total number of children out of school fell from 106 million to 67 million between 1999 and 2009. Almost half of these children—32 million—live in sub-Saharan Africa, despite the region’s strong efforts to increase enrolment. A quarter of the children out of school, or 16 million, are in Southern Asia. Being female, poor and living in a country affected by conflict are three of the most pervasive factors keeping children out of school. Of the total number of primary-age children in the world who are not enrolled in school, 42 per cent—28 million—live in poor countries affected by conflict. Over the decade, the share of girls in the total out-of-school population dropped from 58 per cent to 53 per cent.

18 | The Millennium Development Goals Report 2011

Refugee children face steep barriers to getting an education the remaining 62 camps, fewer than 70 per cent were enrolled. One reason for poor enrolment may be the lack of qualified teachers willing to work in refugee camps. Moreover, classrooms tend to be overcrowded, textbooks are generally in short supply, and basic sanitation is frequently lacking. Among youth in refugee camps, 73 per cent of adolescent girls and 66 per cent of adolescent boys were out of school.

Children displaced from their homes face a multitude of problems, including getting an education, according to the United Nations High Commissioner for Refugees. In 87 urban areas for which the UNHCR has data, 37 per cent of refugee children had no access to schooling. When they do, it is often an unsettling experience, due to stigma and discrimination that can result from being an outsider, the fact that they may not understand the language of instruction and difficulties in obtaining certification of classes completed. In addition, governments may not allow refugee children to attend public schools. A strained economic situation in the family often means that children are forced to work or care for their siblings, and obligatory school fees may simply make education unaffordable.

It is important to note that these data reflect only registered refugees. Those who are unregistered are probably even less likely to attend school, since they may have entered the country illegally. Access to education is particularly difficult for refugees living without legal status in urban areas. A major obstacle in remedying the situation is the lack of funding for education in emergencies. Just 2 per cent of humanitarian aid globally is allocated to education.

Out of the 132 refugee camps with available data (in both urban and rural areas), only 38 reported that all refugee children were enrolled in school. In 32 camps, at least 70 per cent of children were enrolled. And in

The majority of children who are out of school in sub-Saharan Africa will never enter a classroom Distribution of out-of-school children by school exposure, selected countries, surveys between 2002 and 2010 (Percentage) 100

Expected never to enter

Expected to enter

Dropped out

Brazil

Colombia

Bangladesh

Bolivia

Cambodia

Maldives

Liberia

Ghana

Zambia

Nepal

D. R. Congo

Ethiopia

Pakistan

Yemen

Kyrgyzstan

India

Timor-Leste

Tajikistan

Guinea

Nigeria

Senegal

Niger

Mali

Goal 2: Achieve universal primary education | 19

The majority of out-of-school children in sub-Saharan Africa are largely excluded from education, and most will never enter a classroom. However, household survey data from 23 countries show that in several countries with large out-of-school populations, many children do have exposure to education. Countries show distinct patterns in the distribution of out-ofschool children.

out-of-school children will eventually enter school, revealing the extent to which late entry is a widespread phenomenon. In that country, dropping out of primary school is uncommon. In Nigeria, about three quarters of primary-age children who are out of school will likely have no exposure to education at all. This pattern indicates that barriers to education in Nigeria are especially difficult to overcome.

In the Democratic Republic of the Congo, for example, about half of all out-of-school children of primary age are expected to enter school late. About one quarter will never enter a classroom, while another quarter attended school in the past but dropped out. In Ethiopia, almost three quarters of primary-age

In some countries, such as Brazil, Colombia and the Maldives, a significant proportion of out-of-school children had attended school in the past, but dropped out. In other countries, such as Cambodia, Liberia and Zambia, most out-of-school children will be attending school at some point in the near future.

Southern Asia and Northern Africa lead the way in expanding literacy among youth Youth literacy rate, 1990 and 2009 (Percentage) Sub-Saharan Africa

72 73

Oceania Southern Asia

75 80

Northern Africa

87 83

World

89 87

Western Asia

93 92

Latin America & the Caribbean

South-Eastern Asia

Eastern Asia

98 99

Caucasus & Central Asia

100

Developed regions

100 60

Worldwide, the literacy rate of youth (aged 15 to 24) increased from 83 per cent to 89 per cent between 1990 and 2009. Southern Asia and Northern Africa chalked up the most progress, with increases of 20 percentage points and 19 percentage points, respectively. Sub-Saharan Africa showed significant improvement as well—a rise of 7 percentage points.

100

Still, it remains the region with the lowest youth literacy rate (72 per cent in 2009). In spite of overall progress, 127 million young people lacked basic reading and writing skills in 2009. Nearly 90 per cent of all illiterate youth live in just two regions: Southern Asia (65 million) and sub-Saharan Africa (47 million).

20 | The Millennium Development Goals Report 2011

Goal 3 Promote gender equality and empower women

Target Eliminate gender disparity in primary and secondary education, preferably by 2005, and in all levels of education no later than 2015

Girls are gaining ground when it comes to education, though unequal access persists in many regions Gender parity index for gross enrolment ratio in primary, secondary and tertiary education (Girls’ school enrolment ratio in relation to boys’ enrolment ratio), 1998/1999 and 2008/2009 (Girls per 100 boys) Primary education Oceania Sub-Saharan Africa Western Asia Northern Africa Southern Asia Latin America & the Caribbean South-Eastern Asia Caucasus & Central Asia Eastern Asia Developing regions

90 89 85 92 86 92 90 95 95 83 97 97 96 97 99 98 101 104 91 96 Secondary education

Sub-Saharan Africa Western Asia Oceania Southern Asia Caucasus & Central Asia Northern Africa South-Eastern Asia Eastern Asia Latin America & the Caribbean Developing regions

82 74

79 86 89 88 75 89 98 98 93 98 95 103 93 106 107 108 88 96

Tertiary education Sub-Saharan Africa Southern Asia Oceania Western Asia Northern Africa Eastern Asia Caucasus & Central Asia South-Eastern Asia Latin America & the Caribbean Developing regions

67 63 65 74 81 86 78 87 74 98 67 103 91 107 96 109 117 126 82 97 0

1999

2009

100

120

Target = Gender parity index between 97 and 103

In developing regions, 96 girls were enrolled in primary and in secondary school for every 100 boys in 2009. This is a significant improvement since 1999, when the ratios were 91 and 88, respectively. However, only three regions—the Caucasus and Central Asia, Latin America and the Caribbean, and South-Eastern Asia— have achieved gender parity in primary education (defined

Goal 3: Promote gender equality and empower women | 21

Latin America and the Caribbean when it comes to participation in secondary school.

as a gender parity index between 97 and 103). Exceptionally, in Eastern Asia, girls slightly outnumber boys in primary school. Progress for girls has lagged in most other parts of the developing world, and equal access to education in the early years remains a distant target in Northern Africa, Oceania, Southern Asia, sub-Saharan Africa and Western Asia.

The picture is quite different at the tertiary level of education. It is at this level that the gender parity index for the whole of the developing world is highest, at 97 girls for every 100 boys. But it is also where the greatest gender disparity is observed. Among the developing regions, only Eastern Asia and Northern Africa have achieved gender parity in tertiary education. Participation rates are either skewed heavily in favour of boys, as in Oceania, Southern Asia, subSaharan Africa and Western Asia, or in favour of girls, as in the Caucasus and Central Asia, Latin America and the Caribbean, and South-Eastern Asia.

At the level of secondary education, the Caucasus and Central Asia, Northern Africa and South-Eastern Asia have achieved gender parity. However, girls remain at a distinct disadvantage in Oceania, Southern Asia, sub-Saharan Africa and Western Asia. In contrast, girls have surpassed boys in Eastern Asia and in

Wide gaps remain in women’s access to paid work in at least half of all regions Employees in non-agricultural employment who are women, 1990, 2009 and projections to 2015 (Percentage) 50

40 36 37

36 33

20 19

22 19 19 20

38 38

45 46

48 49 44 40

19 13

0 Western Asia 1990

Northern Africa 2009

Southern Sub-Saharan Asia Africa

Oceania South-Eastern Asia

Eastern Asia

Latin America Caucasus Developed & the & regions Caribbean Central Asia

World

2015 projections

Worldwide, the share of women in non-agricultural paid employment increased from 35 per cent in 1990 to almost 40 per cent in 2009. Progress has slowed in recent years, however, due to the financial and economic crisis of 2008-2009. Southern Asia and sub-Saharan Africa saw the greatest improvement, though the proportion of women in paid employment in the former region remains below 20 per cent. In sub-Saharan Africa, progress is undermined to some extent by the fact that non-agricultural

wage employment represents only a minor share of employment for both women and men, who tend to work in jobs that lack financial security and social benefits. The situation in Northern Africa has remained practically unchanged since 1990. In that region as well as in Western Asia, fewer than one in five paid jobs outside the agricultural sector are held by women.

22 | The Millennium Development Goals Report 2011

Women have yet to see the fruits of the 2010 economic recovery The global financial and economic crisis of 20082009 had an adverse impact on labour markets worldwide and slowed progress towards many of the MDGs. Employment declined, unemployment increased and millions of people dropped out of the labour force because they were too discouraged to continue looking for work. Pay cheques, too, were affected. At the onset of the crisis in 2009, unemployment rates for men were increasing faster than those for women. In 2010, the world economy began to recover and unemployment started to decrease among both sexes. However, the unemployment rate for men declined faster than that for women. This trend—combined with the fact that women’s unemployment rates already exceeded those of men—suggests that the gap between women and men in many regions will not close any time soon. Similarly, following significant job losses in 20082009, the growth in employment that occurred during the recovery in 2010, especially in the developing regions, was lower for women than for men. Women employed in manufacturing industries were especially hard hit.

Representation by women in parliament is at an all-time high, but falls shamefully short of parity Proportion of seats held by women in single or lower houses of national parliaments, 2000 and 2011 (Percentage) Oceania 4 2 Western Asia 4 9 Northern Africa 3 12 Caucasus & Central Asia 7 16 South-Eastern Asia 12 18 Southern Asia 7 18 Eastern Asia 19,9 19,5 Sub-Saharan Africa 13 20 Latin America & the Caribbean 15 23 Developed regions 16 23 Developing regions 12 18 World 14 19 0

5 2000

2011

Despite growing numbers of women parliamentarians, the target of equal participation of women and men in politics is still far off. By end-January 2011, women held 19.3 per cent of seats in single or lower houses of parliament worldwide. This is an all-time high. Still, it confirms a pattern of slow progress over the past 15 years from a world average of 11.6 per cent in 1995. In addition, large disparities are found in women’s representation among countries. In early 2011, women

Goal 3: Promote gender equality and empower women | 23

made up 30 per cent or more of the members of single or lower houses of parliaments in 25 countries, including seven countries where the share was 40 per cent or more. Some countries have achieved high levels of participation by women in either of these houses of parliament: Rwanda (56.3 per cent), Sweden (45.0 per cent), South Africa (44.5 per cent) and Cuba (43.2 per cent). In contrast, 48 countries have less than 10 per cent women members in their lower or single houses. Nine countries—Belize, the Federated States of Micronesia, Nauru, Oman, Palau, Qatar, Saudi Arabia, Solomon Islands and Tuvalu—have no women parliamentarians at all. In 2010, gains for women were registered in just half of all parliamentary elections or renewals. The most notable progress was seen in Northern Africa, where women’s representation in single or lower houses increased from 9.0 per cent to 11.7 per cent between 2010 and 2011. Progress was also made in Western Asia, where women’s representation in single or lower houses continued to rise: from 4.2 per cent in 2000 to 8.8 per cent in 2010 to 9.4 per cent in 2011. Even so, vast disparities are found among countries in the region. Moreover, progress for women is often dependent on special measures. In Bahrain, only one woman parliamentarian, who ran unopposed, was elected to the lower house. Meanwhile, the women in Bahrain’s upper house, representing 27.5 per cent of its members, were mostly appointed. Jordan now has 13 women in its lower house and nine women in its upper house due to a strengthened quota system. In the Americas, Costa Rican women continue to wield power, representing 38.6 per cent of the lower house. The mid-term elections in the United States saw a record number of women running for both houses of Congress, but this did not result in major gains. Sub-Saharan Africa has also seen recent progress, with Ethiopia, Madagascar and the United Republic of Tanzania recording improvements in 2010. Burundi consolidated its representation by women in the lower house of parliament with an increase to 32.1 per cent, from 30.5 per cent in 2005, and saw a significant rise in the upper house (from 34.7 to 46.3 per cent), largely due to a quota system. Women’s representation in Sao Tome and Principe, unaided by quotas, increased from 7.3 per cent in 2006 to 18.2 per cent in 2010. In a year of high-profile elections, Southern Asia and South-Eastern Asia saw no progress. Women maintained strong representation in Afghanistan in the 2010 polls, but this resulted in only a small gain of one additional woman parliamentarian. SouthEastern Asia saw a small drop in the number of women

parliamentarians, from 19.3 per cent to 17.6 per cent between 2010 and 2011. In the Philippines, women lost ground in the upper house. In Oceania, the percentage of women parliamentarians dropped to only 2.3 per cent in 2011. Quota arrangements and measures taken by political parties continue to be key predictors of success. Legislated quotas or voluntary party quotas have been implemented for 67 per cent of the 43 lower houses with 30 per cent or more women members. At the leadership level, two parliaments saw women speakers elected for the first time: Mozambique and the United Republic of Tanzania. Worldwide, women now account for only 13.4 per cent of presiding officers in parliament. In January 2011, just 10 countries had female heads of state, and 13 countries had female heads of government. Quotas are not the only factors that influence the level of women’s political participation, however. Electoral systems are also key, as are gender-sensitive electoral arrangements. In 2010, many women contenders for political office suffered from a shortage of both media coverage and public appearances. Well trained and financed women candidates and political will at the highest levels of political parties and governments are paramount for overcoming gender imbalances in the world’s parliaments.

24â&#x20AC;&#x192; |â&#x20AC;&#x192; The Millennium Development Goals Report 2011

Target

Goal 4 Reduce child mortality

Reduce by two thirds, between 1990 and 2015, the underfive mortality rate

Achieving the goal for child survival hinges on action to address the leading causes of death Under-five mortality rate, 1990 and 2009 (Deaths per 1,000 live births) Sub-Saharan Africa 180 129 Southern Asia 122 69 Oceania 76 59 Caucasus & Central Asia 78 37 South-Eastern Asia 73 36 Western Asia 68 32 Northern Africa 80 26 Latin America & the Caribbean 52 23 Eastern Asia 45 19 Developed regions 15 7 Developing regions 99 66 0

50 1990

100 2009

150

200

2015 target

Steady progress is being made in reducing child deaths. Globally, the mortality rate for children under five has declined by a third, from 89 deaths per 1,000 live births in 1990 to 60 in 2009. All regions, except sub-Saharan Africa, Southern Asia and Oceania, have seen reductions of at least 50 per cent. Despite population growth, the number of deaths in children under five worldwide declined from 12.4 million in 1990 to 8.1 million in 2009, which translates into nearly 12,000 fewer children dying each day. The greatest success is found in Northern Africa and Eastern Asia, where under-five mortality declined by 68 per cent and

Goal 4: Reduce child mortality | 25

58 per cent, respectively. Among countries with high under-five mortality (above 40 deaths per 1,000 live births), 10 countries reduced their rates by at least half. Among them, Bangladesh, Eritrea, Lao People’s Democratic Republic, Madagascar, Nepal and TimorLeste recorded a 60 per cent drop or more.

time, major inroads are being made. Four of the ten countries with more than a 50 per cent reduction in child deaths between 1990 and 2009 are in subSaharan Africa. Furthermore, five of the six countries with a reduction of more than 100 deaths per 1,000 live births are in this region.

The highest levels of under-five mortality continue to be found in sub-Saharan Africa, where one in eight children die before the age of five (129 deaths per 1,000 live births), nearly twice the average in developing regions overall and around 18 times the average in developed regions. With rapid progress in other regions, the disparities between them and subSaharan Africa have widened. Southern Asia has the second highest rate—69 deaths per 1,000 live births or about one child in 14.

Increasing evidence suggests that the MDG target can be reached, but only with substantial and accelerated action to eliminate the leading killers of children. In sub-Saharan Africa, diarrhoea, malaria and pneumonia are responsible for more than half the deaths of children under five. In Southern Asia, over half of all childhood deaths occur in the first 28 days after birth, pointing to the need for better post-natal care. In both regions, undernutrition is an underlying cause of a third of these deaths. Special efforts to fight pneumonia, diarrhoea and malaria, while bolstering nutrition, could save the lives of millions of children.

All of the 31 countries with under-five mortality of at least 100 deaths per 1,000 live births, except Afghanistan, are in sub-Saharan Africa. At the same

Children in rural areas are more at risk of dying, even in regions where child mortality is low Despite substantial progress in reducing child deaths, children from rural households are still at a disadvantage, according to household survey data from 80 countries. This holds true for all developing regions. Disparities are most pronounced in Latin America and the Caribbean and in Eastern and South-Eastern Asia (excluding China), where overall child mortality is low.

Ratio of rural to urban under-five mortality rate, 2000/2008 Latin America & the Caribbean 1.7 Eastern Asia (excluding China) & South-Eastern Asia 1.6 Southern Asia 1.5 Northern Africa & Western Asia 1.4 Sub-Saharan Africa 1.4 Caucasus & Central Asia 1.3 Developing regions 1.4 0

Higher under-five mortality in urban areas

Equal

Higher under-five mortality in rural areas

Note: Analysis is based on 80 developing countries with data on under-five mortality rate by residence, accounting for 73 per cent of total births in developing regions in 2008.

26 | The Millennium Development Goals Report 2011

Children from the poorest households are two to three times more likely to die before the age of five than children from the richest households Ratio of under-five mortality rate for children from the poorest households to that of children from the richest households, 2000/2008 Latin America & the Caribbean 2.9 Eastern Asia (excluding China) & South-Eastern Asia 2.8 Southern Asia 2.7 Northern Africa & Western Asia 2.6

According to data from 66 countries, children from the poorest households are also at a disadvantage when it comes to surviving their first five years of life. In the developing regions as a whole, children from the poorest 20 per cent of households have more than twice the risk of dying before their fifth birthday as children in the richest 20 per cent of households. Again, the greatest disparities are found in Latin America and the Caribbean and in Eastern and SouthEastern Asia (excluding China), where the risk is nearly three times as high.

Sub-Saharan Africa 1.8 Caucasus & Central Asia 1.7 Developing regions 2.2 0

Higher under-five mortality among the richest 20% Equal

Higher under-five mortality among the poorest 20%

Note: Analysis is based on 66 developing countries with data on under-five mortality rate by household’s wealth quintile, accounting for 71 per cent of total births in developing regions in 2008.

A mother’s education is a powerful determinant of child survival Ratio of under-five mortality rate of children of mothers with no education to that of children of mothers with secondary or higher education; ratio of under-five mortality rate of children of mothers with no education to that of children of mothers with primary education, 2000/2008 Latin America & the Caribbean 3.1 1.6

Children of mothers with no education compared to children of mothers with secondary or higher education Children of mothers with no education compared to children of mothers with primary education

Eastern Asia (excluding China) & South-Eastern Asia 3.0 1.9 Southern Asia

Note: Analysis is based on 68 developing countries with data on under-five mortality rate by mother’s education, accounting for 74 per cent of total births in developing regions in 2008.

2.1 1.3 Northern Africa & Western Asia 2.0 1.2 Sub-Saharan Africa 2.0 1.2 Developing regions 2.1 1.3 0

Higher under-five Equal mortality among children of more educated mothers

3 Higher under-five mortality among children of less educated mothers

A mother’s education is key in determining whether her children will survive their first five years of life. In all developing regions, children of mothers with some education are at less risk of dying. A child’s chances of surviving increase even further if their mother has a secondary or higher education. In addition to education, child survival rates can also be improved by increasing equity in other social services. Empowering women, removing financial and social barriers to welfare, encouraging innovations to make critical services more available to the poor, and increasing the accountability of health systems at the local level are examples of policy interventions that could improve equity, with benefits for child survival.

Goal 4: Reduce child mortalityâ&#x20AC;&#x192; |â&#x20AC;&#x192;27

Children who are poor and hardest to reach still lack access to the lifesaving measles vaccine

Child deaths due to measles have plummeted, but shortfalls in funding put continued success in jeopardy

Proportion of children 12-23 months old who received at least one dose of measles vaccine, 2000 and 2009 (Percentage)

Estimated child deaths due to measles, 1999-2008 (Thousands) 900

Oceania 66 58 Sub-Saharan Africa 55

600

68 Southern Asia 56 75

300

Western Asia 84 82 South-Eastern Asia 81

0 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008

Middle East & Central Asia Eastern Asia & the Pacific

Caucasus & Central Asia 93 92 Latin America & the Caribbean

Between 2000 and 2008, the combination of improved immunization coverage and the opportunity for a second dose led to a 78 per cent drop in measles deaths worldwide. These averted deaths represent one quarter of the decline in mortality from all causes among children under five.

92 93 Eastern Asia 84 94 Northern Africa 93 94 Developed regions 92 94 Developing regions 69 80 0

2000

Southern Asia Africa

100

2009

Expanded coverage of immunization against measles is an important indicator for child survival. In 2009, 80 per cent of children in the appropriate age group received at least one dose of the measles vaccine, up from 69 per cent in 2000. Though important gains have been made, the poorest, most marginalized children, especially in hard-to-reach areas, have been left behind. In countries with lower coverage, immunization campaigns have been effective in vaccinating children who are beyond the reach of existing health services. However, reinvigorated and sustained efforts are needed to consistently improve access to the most vulnerable, through both routine immunization and campaigns.

However, this resounding success could be in jeopardy. Reduced funding for measles-control activities means that a number of priority countries are facing shortfalls in resources for both routine immunizations and immunization campaigns. As a result, outbreaks of the disease are on the rise. With adequate funding, strong political commitment and high-quality implementation, the exceptional gains made so far can be maintained and protection extended to all children.

28â&#x20AC;&#x192; |â&#x20AC;&#x192; The Millennium Development Goals Report 2011

Target

Goal 5 Improve maternal health

Reduce by three quarters, between 1990 and 2015, the maternal mortality ratio

Despite progress, pregnancy remains a major health risk for women in several regions Maternal deaths per 100,000 live births, 1990, 2000, 2008 Sub-Saharan Africa 870 790 640 Southern Asia 590 420 280 Oceania 290 260 230 Caribbean 320 230 170 South-Eastern Asia 380 230 160 Northern Africa 230 120 92 Latin America 130 99 80 Western Asia 140 98 70 Caucasus & Central Asia 70 69 54 Eastern Asia 110 63 41 Developed regions 26 17 17 Developing regions 440 370 290 0

200 1990

400 2000

600 2008

800

1000

Target

Despite proven interventions that could prevent disability or death during pregnancy and childbirth, maternal mortality remains a major burden in many developing countries. Figures

Goal 5: Improve maternal health | 29

on maternal mortality tend to be uncertain. Still, the most recent estimates suggest significant progress. In the developing regions as a whole, the maternal mortality ratio dropped by 34 per cent between 1990 and 2008, from 440 maternal deaths per 100,000 live births to 290 maternal deaths. However, the MDG target is still far off.

Major gains have been made in increasing skilled attendance at birth, most notably in Northern Africa and Southern Asia Proportion of deliveries attended by skilled health personnel, around 1990 and around 2009 (Percentage) Sub-Saharan Africa

Eastern Asia, Northern Africa, South-Eastern Asia and Southern Asia have made the greatest strides. Between 1990 and 2008, 90 countries showed declines in their maternal mortality ratios of 40 per cent or more, while another 57 countries reported at least some gains. However, more can and must be done to save women’s lives and prevent disabilities that could irrevocably alter a woman’s and her family’s future. This is especially true given the increasing number of young women entering their prime reproductive years in countries already hard pressed to meet current demands for improved maternal health and reproductive health care.

42 46 Southern Asia 32 50 Oceania 54 56 Caribbean* 67 69 South-Eastern Asia 49 72

Maternal deaths are concentrated in sub-Saharan Africa and Southern Asia, which together accounted for 87 per cent of such deaths globally in 2008. Southern Asia has made steady progress, with a 53 per cent decline in maternal mortality between 1990 and 2008. In contrast, the ratio has fallen by only 26 per cent in sub-Saharan Africa, though evidence suggests that progress has picked up speed since 2000.

Western Asia

The vast majority of maternal deaths are avoidable. The largest proportion of such deaths are caused by obstetric haemorrhage, mostly during or just after delivery, followed by eclampsia, sepsis, complications of unsafe abortion and indirect causes, such as malaria and HIV. Studies have also shown that the likelihood of maternal death increases among women who have many children, are poorly educated, are either very young or very old, and who are subjected to gender discrimination.

Caucasus & Central Asia

62 78 Northern Africa 45 81 Latin America* 70 90 93 97 Eastern Asia 94 99 Developed regions 99 99 Developing regions 55 65 0

20 1990

100

2009

* Includes only deliveries in health-care institutions.

The presence of a trained health-care worker during delivery is crucial in reducing maternal deaths. A skilled health professional can administer interventions to prevent and manage life-threatening complications, such as heavy bleeding, or refer the patient to a higher level of care when needed. In developing regions overall, the proportion of deliveries attended by skilled health personnel rose

30 | The Millennium Development Goals Report 2011

from 55 per cent in 1990 to 65 per cent in 2009. Despite dramatic progress in many regions, coverage remains low in sub-Saharan Africa and Southern Asia, where the majority of maternal deaths occur. That said, the proportion of deliveries attended by a skilled health professional in Southern Asia has increased substantially—from 32 per cent in 1990 to 50 per cent in 2009.

Target Achieve, by 2015, universal access to reproductive health

Across all regions, more pregnant women are offered at least minimal care Proportion of women (15-49 years old) attended at least once by skilled health personnel during pregnancy, 1990 and 2009 (Percentage) Southern Asia 51 70 Sub-Saharan Africa 68 78 Oceania 77 79 Northern Africa 51 79 Western Asia 62 84 Eastern Asia 70 91 South-Eastern Asia 72 92 Latin America & the Caribbean 77 95 Caucasus & Central Asia 90 96 Developing regions 64 81 0

20 1990

100

2009

Health care during pregnancy is vitally important in detecting and managing conditions that may complicate pregnancy and childbirth. Basic antenatal care provides women with a package of preventive interventions, including nutritional advice. Women are also alerted to danger signs that may threaten their pregnancy and given support in planning a safe delivery. Moreover, in countries where malaria is endemic, they may be provided with intermittent preventive treatment. Women who are HIV-positive receive help in avoiding transmission of the virus to their babies.

Goal 5: Improve maternal healthâ&#x20AC;&#x192; |â&#x20AC;&#x192;31

Since 1990, the proportion of women receiving antenatal care has increased substantially in all regions. Across all developing regions, the share of pregnant women attended at least once during pregnancy increased from 64 per cent in 1990 to 81 per cent in 2009.

Gains made during the 1990s to reduce adolescent pregnancies have stalled in many regions Number of births per 1,000 women aged 15-19, 1990, 2000 and 2008 Sub-Saharan Africa

Not enough women receive the recommended frequency of care during pregnancy

124 123 122 Latin America 92 88

Proportion of women (15-49 years old) attended four or more times by any provider during pregnancy, 1990 and 2009 (Percentage)

82 Caribbean 81 77

Southern Asia (excluding India) 10 26

69 Oceania 83

Sub-Saharan Africa

63 61

44 43

Southern Asia 89

Southern Asia 23

59 53

Western Asia

53 52

54 South-Eastern Asia

Northern Africa 20

54 40 44

57 South-Eastern Asia

Northern Africa

33 30

Latin America & the Caribbean

Caucasus & Central Asia 45 28 29

69 84 Developing regions 35 51 0

20 1990

100

2009

Note: Data for Eastern Asia are not available.

A minimum of four antenatal care visits is recommended to ensure that pregnant women receive the interventions they need to prevent and manage complications. The proportion of women receiving the recommended number of visits in developing regions remains low, though progress is being made, increasing from 35 per cent in 1990 to 51 per cent in 2009.

Eastern Asia 15 6 6 Developed regions 34 26 24 Developing regions 65 56 54 0

20 1990

60 2000

100

120

140

2008

Very early childbearing brings with it heightened risks of complications or even death. In almost all regions, the adolescent birth rate (the number of births per 1,000 women aged 15 to 19) decreased between 1990 and 2000 and then slowed its decline or even

32â&#x20AC;&#x192; |â&#x20AC;&#x192; The Millennium Development Goals Report 2011

increased in the subsequent eight years. Sub-Saharan Africa has the highest birth rate among adolescents (122 births per 1,000 women), which has changed little since 1990.

Contraceptive use rises, but gains made will be difficult to sustain due to the growing number of women of reproductive age

Across the developing world, women are having fewer children. But even in some of the regions where overall fertility has declined, adolescent fertility remains relatively high.

Proportion of women who are using any method of contraception among women aged 15-49, married or in a union, 1990, 2000 and 2008 (Percentage) Sub-Saharan Africa 13 20 22 Oceania 29 32 37 Southern Asia 40 47 54 Western Asia 44 51 55 Caucasus & Central Asia 54 60 56 Northern Africa 44 59 61 Caribbean 54 60 62 South-Eastern Asia 48 57 62 Latin America 63 72 74 Eastern Asia 78 86 84 Developed regions

69 71 72

Developing regions 52 60 61 0

20 1990

40 2000

100

2008

Throughout the world, increased access to safe, affordable and effective methods of contraception has provided individuals with greater opportunities for choice and responsible decision-making in matters of

Goal 5: Improve maternal health | 33

reproduction. Contraceptive use has also contributed to improvements in maternal and infant health by preventing unintended or closely spaced pregnancies and pregnancy in very young women, which can be risky. By 2008, more than half of all women aged 15 to 49 who were married or in a union were using some form of contraception in all but two regions—subSaharan Africa and Oceania. However, progress slowed from 2000 to 2008 in almost all regions. Women

in sub-Saharan Africa—where maternal mortality is high and access to skilled care during pregnancy and at childbirth is limited—continue to have the lowest level of contraceptive prevalence (22 per cent), with little progress reported since 2000. As the number of women of reproductive age in developing regions continues to rise, increasing by nearly 50 per cent since 1990, family planning programmes and healthcare services need to invest more, to simply keep pace with the growing number of women wishing to use contraception.

The unmet need for contraceptives remains high in many regions, with inadequate support for family planning Worldwide, more than 120 million women aged 15 to 49 who are married or in a union have an unmet need for family planning. In other words, these women have the desire to delay or avoid pregnancy, but are not using any form of contraception. The unmet need for family planning has remained at the same moderate to high level in most regions since 2000, but is highest in sub-Saharan Africa and the Caribbean. In those regions, respectively, at least one in five and one in four women of childbearing age who are married or in a union have an unmet need for contraception. The unmet need for family planning is lowest where contraceptive prevalence is already high (above 60 per cent). Yet, even in regions such as South-Eastern Asia and Northern Africa, where contraceptive use is relatively widespread, the family planning needs of at least one in ten women are not being met.

Proportion of women who have an unmet need for family planning among women aged 15-49 who are married or in a union, 1990, 2000 and 2008 (Percentage) Sub-Saharan Africa 26 24 25 Caribbean 19.5 20.4 20.2 Southern Asia 20 17 15 Caucasus & Central Asia 14 12 12 Western Asia 16 14 12 South-Eastern Asia 15 11 11 Northern Africa 19 11

10 Latin America 16 10 9 Eastern Asia 3 2 2 Developing regions 14 12 11 0

5 1990

15 2000

20 2008

34â&#x20AC;&#x192; |â&#x20AC;&#x192; The Millennium Development Goals Report 2011

Reaching adolescents is critical to improving maternal health and achieving other Millennium Development Goals Contraceptive prevalence, unmet need for contraception, and total demand for contraception that is satisfied among women who are married or in a union, by age group, selected countries in sub-Saharan Africa, 1998/2008 (Percentage) 50

45 40

30 29 26 20

10 10

0 Contraceptive prevalence

Unmet need for contraception

15-49 years old

15-19 years old

Total demand for contraception that is satisfied

In sub-Saharan Africa, contraceptive use among adolescents is substantially lower than that of all women of reproductive age, though they have similar levels of unmet need (25 per cent). This was the conclusion drawn from data available for 22 countries, which looked at contraceptive use among women aged 15 to 19 who were married or in a union. Thus, the percentage of adolescents who have their demand for contraception satisfied is much lower than that of all women aged 15 to 49. This disparity in access has changed little according to data from the same sources for earlier periods, pointing to scant progress in improving access to reproductive health care for adolescents. Global population estimates suggest that the number of women aged 15 to 19 is approaching 300 million. The fastest growth is expected in sub-Saharan Africa and in the least developed countries overall, where the risks associated with pregnancy and childbearing are greatest. Intensified efforts are urgently needed to delay or prevent unintended pregnancies among this vulnerable age group. These efforts will not only result in improved maternal and child health, but will contribute to reduced poverty, greater gender equality and the empowerment of women by improving the chances that these young women will go to school and eventually engage in paid employment.

Goal 5: Improve maternal healthâ&#x20AC;&#x192; |â&#x20AC;&#x192;35 Official development assistance to health, total (constant 2009 US$ millions) and proportion going to reproductive health care and family Aid for planning family(percentage), planning2000-2009 has fallen in all recipient countries Official development assistance to health, total (Constant 2009 US$ millions) and proportion going to reproductive health care and family planning (Percentage), 2000-2009 Millions

Percentage 19,790

20,000 18,000

100 90

17,581 16,726

16,000

15,442

14,000 12,584

12,000 9,745

10,000

10,353

6,557

6,000

Aid to family planning (Percentage)

6,402

30 20

4,000 2,000

Aid to reproductive health care (Percentage)

7,949

8,000

Total aid to health (Constant 2009 US$ millions)

9.2 8.2

0 2000

11.3

9.8 6.1

5.9

5.4

2001

2002

3.1

2003

6.1 1.0

2004

5.1 1.7

2005

8.5 1.3

2006

Over the coming decades, demand for family planning will likely increase, based on substantial unmet need and the expected rise in the number of women and men of reproductive age. Yet funding for family planning services and supplies has not risen commensurately. Aid for family planning as a proportion of total aid for health declined over the past decade and stood at 2.6 per cent

7.2

7.7

3.2

3.3

6.0 2.6

2007

2008

2009

10 0

in 2009. This means that, on a per capita basis, aid for family planning has fallen in virtually all recipient countries. Ensuring the funding necessary to meet the growing demand for contraceptives could ultimately reduce the cost of maternal and newborn health care by preventing unintended pregnancies.

36 | The Millennium Development Goals Report 2011

Goal 6 Combat HIV/AIDS, malaria and other diseases

Target Have halted by 2015 and begun to reverse the spread of HIV/AIDS

New HIV infections are declining, led by subSaharan Africa, but trends in some other regions are worrisome HIV incidence rates* (Number of new HIV infections per year per 100 people aged 15-49), 2001 and 2009 Sub-Saharan Africa 0.57 0.40 Caribbean 0.09 0.08 South-Eastern Asia & Oceania 0.04 0.04 Latin America 0.04 0.03 Caucasus & Central Asia 0.01 0.03 Southern Asia 0.04 0.02 Eastern Asia 0.01 0.01 Northern Africa 0.01 0.01 Western Asia <0.01 <0.01 Developed regions 0.05 0.03 Developing regions 0.09 0.08 World 0.08 0.06 0.00

0.10 2001

0.20

0.30

0.40

0.50

0.60

2009

* The incidence rate is the number of new HIV infections in a population over a certain period of time, expressed as a percentage of the adult population aged 15-49. For example, an incidence rate of 0.4 per cent in sub-Saharan Africa in 2009 meant that 4 adults out of 1,000 were newly infected that year (leading to a total of 1.8 million new infections in the region).

Between 2001 and 2009, the HIV incidence rate declined steadily, by nearly 25 per cent worldwide. However, this global progress masks substantial regional differences. While the

Goal 6: Combat HIV/AIDS, malaria and other diseases | 37

incidence rate fell significantly in sub-Saharan Africa and Southern Asia, it remained unchanged in Eastern Asia, Western Europe, Central Europe and North America. Worse, it is on the rise in Eastern Europe and Central Asia after an initial decline during the first half of the decade.

In 2009, an estimated 2.6 million people were newly infected with HIV. This represents a drop of 21 per cent since 1997, the year in which new infections peaked.

The number of people living with HIV continues to rise, due to life-prolonging treatment

40.0

3.5

35.0

3.0

2.5

2.0

30.0

25.0

23 21

20.0

1.5

15.0

15 13

1.0

People living with HIV (Millions)

People newly infected with HIV and number of deaths due to AIDS (Millions)

Number of people living with HIV, number of people newly infected with HIV, and number of AIDS deaths worldwide,* 1990-2009 (Millions)

10.0

10 8 0.5

5.0

0.0

0.0 1990 1991 1992 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009

Number of people living with HIV

Number of people newly infected with HIV

Number of deaths due to AIDS

* All AIDS-related figures are the midpoint in a range. The estimate of 2.6 million new infections in 2009, for example, is based on a range of 2.3 million-2.8 million. The complete data series of ranges and corresponding midpoints is available at http://mdgs.un.org.

The number of people receiving antiretroviral treatment for HIV or AIDS increased 13-fold from 2004 to 2009. As a result, the number of AIDS-related deaths declined by 19 per cent over the same period. Although new infections are waning, the number of people living with HIV has grown. In 2009, 33.3 million people were living with the virus—a 27 per cent increase over 1999. Sub-Saharan Africa remains the most heavily affected region, accounting for 69 per cent of new HIV infections, 68 per cent of all people living with HIV and 72 per cent

of AIDS deaths. Yet the epidemic has not spared other regions, with more than 10.8 million people outside of sub-Saharan Africa living with the virus. Women and young people are especially vulnerable. Globally, nearly 23 per cent of all people living with HIV are under the age of 25. And young people (aged 15 to 24) account for 41 per cent of new infections among those aged 15 or older. In 2009, women represented a slight majority (about 51 per cent) of people living with HIV.

38 | The Millennium Development Goals Report 2011

Most young people lack comprehensive knowledge of HIV, but now know specific ways to prevent its spread Proportion of women and men aged 15-24 who know they can reduce their risk of getting HIV by using a condom every time they have sexual intercourse, selected countries, 2005/2009 (Percentage) D. R. Congo

Niger

63 63 47

Sierra Leone

64 66 47

Ethiopia

66 59

Mali

68 67 70

Madagascar 52

Nigeria

70 71 71

Senegal

United Republic of Tanzania

73 71 74

Zambia 63

Côte d'Ivoire

75 85

Lesotho 79 Zimbabwe

Kenya

79 79 76 80

Sao Tome and Principe

Guinea

82 72

Uganda

82 75

Ghana

83 66

Congo

83 83 86

Namibia 73

Benin

87 89 87

Swaziland 80

Rwanda

88 0

20 Women

Though global averages remain low, a number of countries have made impressive progress in increasing people’s knowledge about HIV, as measured by the five components that make up the indicator. For instance, knowledge of the methods that can be used to avoid HIV transmission is generally widespread among young people. Recent data from population-based surveys in selected sub-Saharan African countries show that the proportion of young people who know that using condoms can reduce the chances of getting HIV ranges from about 50 per cent to almost 90 per cent in some countries. However, in almost all countries surveyed, young women are less likely to have such knowledge. Youth in rural areas are also less likely to know about prevention methods than their urban counterparts.

Liberia

Understanding how HIV spreads is the first step to avoiding infection. On average, only 33 per cent of young men and 20 per cent of young women in developing regions have a comprehensive and correct knowledge of HIV.1

40 Men

100

China is not included in the calculation.

Goal 6: Combat HIV/AIDS, malaria and other diseasesâ&#x20AC;&#x192; |â&#x20AC;&#x192;39

Condom use to prevent HIV is still dangerously low in many developing countries, especially among women

Despite low levels of condom use on average, some countries are doing better than others, with condomuse levels of 60 per cent or more among either young men or women. However, disparities persist.

Proportion of women and men aged 15-24 reporting use of a condom during higher-risk sex, selected countries 2005/2009 (Percentage)

Young women in developing countries are less likely than young men to use condoms during sex that poses special risks. Condom use is also much less common among young people in poorer households and among those living in rural areas.

D. R. Congo 17 27 India 22 37 Zambia 33 39 United Republic of Tanzania 46 49 Nigeria 36 49 Ethiopia 28 50 Uganda 38 55 Malawi 40 58 Central African Republic 41 60 Kenya 40 64 Lesotho 66 68 Zimbabwe 42 68 Swaziland 54 70 Ukraine 68 71 Namibia 64 81 0

10 Women

Men

Condom use during higher-risk sex is still low among young people in developing regions. On average, less than half of young men and just over a third of young women used condoms during their last high-risk sexual activity in sub-Saharan African countries.

40 | The Millennium Development Goals Report 2011

More children orphaned by AIDS in sub-Saharan Africa are now in school, increasing their chances of receiving vital protection and support Ratio of school attendance of children aged 10-14 who have lost both biological parents to school attendance of non-orphaned children of the same age, selected countries in sub-Saharan Africa, around 2000 and around 2008 Rwanda 0.83 0.82 Côte d'Ivoire 0.83 0.83 Burundi 0.70 0.85

The impact of the HIV epidemic has been acutely felt by children in terms of both health and social outcomes. Globally, in 2009, about 16.6 million children were estimated to have lost one or both parents to AIDS, up from 14.6 million in 2005; 14.8 million of these children live in sub-Saharan Africa.2 Education is vital to children’s futures, and school can provide them with a safe, structured environment in which they can benefit from the emotional support and supervision of adults. Disparities in school attendance show that children who have lost both parents are less likely to be in school than children who have two living parents and who are residing with at least one of them. This gap, however, is narrowing rapidly in sub-Saharan Africa. Recent progress has been remarkable. In some countries in which survey-based trend data are available, the level of school attendance among children aged 10 to 14 who have been orphaned has increased to near parity with that of other children. These improvements suggest that policies such as the elimination of school fees and targeted educational assistance to orphans and other vulnerable children are working. Furthermore, recognition is growing that child-sensitive social protection plays an important role in scaling up support for children orphaned or made vulnerable by AIDS and in keeping these children in school.

Mozambique 0.80 0.89 Ethiopia 0.60 0.90 Zambia 0.91 0.93 Kenya 0.74 0.95 Zimbabwe 0.85 0.95 Lesotho 0.87 0.95

Uganda 0.95 0.96 Central African Republic 0.91 0.96 United Republic of Tanzania 0.74 0.97 Malawi 0.93 0.97 Swaziland 0.91 0.97 Namibia 0.92 1.00 Chad 0.94 1.05 0.00

0.20

Around 2000

0.40

0.60

Around 2008

0.80 Parity

1.00

1.20

The numbers of children orphaned by AIDS are estimates. Lower and upper bounds of these estimates are available at http://mdgs.un.org.

Goal 6: Combat HIV/AIDS, malaria and other diseasesâ&#x20AC;&#x192; |â&#x20AC;&#x192;41

Target Achieve, by 2010, universal access to treatment for HIV/AIDS for all those who need it

Treatment for HIV and AIDS has expanded quickly, but not fast enough to meet the 2010 target for universal access Proportion of population living with HIV who are receiving antiretroviral treatment*, 2004 and 2009 (Percentage) Eastern Asia 6 23 Southern Asia 2 24

Caucasus & Central Asia 2 26

Antiretroviral therapy coverage varies by sex and age. In 2009, coverage was higher among women (39 per cent) than among men (31 per cent). Also, overall coverage among children in low- and middle-income countries was lower than that among adults. About 356,400 children under age 15 were receiving antiretroviral therapy at the end of 2009, up from 275,300 at the end of 2008. These children represented an estimated 28 per cent of all children under 15 who needed treatment in low- and middleincome countries, up from 22 per cent in 2008.

Sub-Saharan Africa 3 37 Caribbean 5 38 South-Eastern Asia & Oceania 12 46 Latin America 39 51 Western Asia 44 57 Low- and middle-income countries 6 36 10 2004

In 2009, the World Health Organization (WHO) revised its guidelines for treatment of adults and adolescents with HIV, including pregnant women. As a result, the number of people defined as needing antiretroviral therapy grewâ&#x20AC;&#x201D;from 10.1 million to 14.6 million at the end of 2009. In the medium term, the higher initial investments required to conform to these guidelines are expected to be fully compensated for by fewer hospitalizations and lower morbidity and mortality rates. Based on the new 2009 guidelines, coverage of antiretroviral therapy increased from 28 per cent in December 2008 to 36 per cent at the end of 2009. Under the previous 2006 guidelines, global coverage would have reached 52 per cent in 2009.

Northern Africa 10 25

need) to antiretroviral therapy and/or interventions to prevent mother-to-child transmission of HIV. For a good number of countries, universal access by the end of 2010 was clearly within reach. Despite these encouraging findings, it is unlikely that the global target for HIV treatment was achieved that year.

2009

100

Range of estimates

* Antiretroviral treatment coverage is measured among people living with HIV with a CD4 cell count at or below 350 cells/mm3.

By the end of 2009, 5.25 million people were receiving antiretroviral therapy for HIV or AIDS in lowand middle-income countries. This represents a jump of over 1.2 million people from December 2008, the largest increase ever in one year. Some countries, including Botswana, Cambodia, Croatia, Cuba, Guyana, Oman, Romania and Rwanda, have already attained universal access (defined as coverage of at least 80 per cent of the population in

42â&#x20AC;&#x192; |â&#x20AC;&#x192; The Millennium Development Goals Report 2011

Steady progress is being made in reducing the risk of HIV in newborns Proportion of women receiving antiretroviral drugs to prevent mother-to-child transmission of HIV, 2004 and 2009 (Percentage) Northern Africa 0 20 Western Asia 0 22

Eastern Asia 3 25 Sub-Saharan Africa 9 53 Latin America 33 53 South-Eastern Asia & Oceania 28 54 Caribbean 20 55 Caucasus & Central Asia 11 56 Low- and middle-income countries 10 53 10 2004

2009

Have halted by 2015 and begun to reverse the incidence of malaria and other major diseases

Intensive control efforts have cut deaths from malaria by 20 per cent, with major advances in hard-hit African countries Major advances are being made against malaria. Over the past decade, increases in funding and attention to malaria control have resulted in widespread reductions in the number of malaria cases and deaths. This was accomplished through critical interventions, particularly in sub-Saharan Africa, involving the development of more effective tools to prevent and fight the disease. These include long-lasting insecticide-treated mosquito nets and artemisininbased combination therapies. Bottlenecks have also been reduced in their production, procurement and distribution.

Southern Asia 7 24

Target

100

Range of estimates

Without treatment, approximately one third of children born to women living with HIV will become infected with the virus in the womb, at birth or through breastfeeding. This risk can be greatly reduced by treating an expectant mother with antiretroviral therapy. An estimated 53 per cent of pregnant women living with HIV received antiretroviral medicines in 2009, up from 45 per cent in 2008. Sub-Saharan Africa is home to about 91 per cent of the 1.4 million pregnant women who are in need of treatment.

Globally, deaths from malaria are down by an estimated 20 per centâ&#x20AC;&#x201D;from nearly 985,000 in 2000 to 781,000 in 2009. At the same time, the number of malaria cases rose from about 233 million in 2000 to 244 million in 2005 but decreased to 225 million in 2009. In all countries, the decreases are associated with intensive control efforts. The largest percentage drops in malaria deaths were found in Europe and the Americas; the largest absolute decreases were observed in Africa. Nevertheless, 90 per cent of all deaths from malaria still occur in sub-Saharan Africa, and most of these deaths are among children under age five. Since 2000, 11 countries in Africa showed reductions of more than 50 per cent in the number of confirmed malaria cases (and/or reported hospital admissions for malaria) and deaths. These include Algeria, Botswana, Cape Verde, Eritrea, Madagascar, Namibia, Rwanda, Sao Tome and Principe, South Africa, Swaziland and Zambia. In other regions, the number of confirmed malaria cases declined by more than half between 2000 and 2009 in 31 of the 56 countries where malaria is endemic; downward trends of between 25 per cent and 50 per cent were reported in eight other countries. In 2009, for the first time, Europe reported no cases of Plasmodium falciparum malaria. The following year, WHO certified that Morocco and Turkmenistan had eliminated malaria. In 2009, evidence pointed to an increase in malaria cases in three countries that had previously reported reductions (Rwanda, Sao Tome and Principe, and

Goal 6: Combat HIV/AIDS, malaria and other diseases | 43

Zambia). The reasons behind these resurgences are uncertain, but they highlight the fragility of progress in malaria control and the need to maintain control programmes rigorously, even when cases have been reduced substantially.

The use of mosquito nets in Africa is rising rapidly, with lifesaving benefits for children Proportion of children under age five sleeping under an insecticide-treated mosquito net, sub-Saharan African countries with two or more comparable data points, around 2000 and around 2010 (Percentage) 0 Swaziland 1 1 Côte d’Ivoire 3

2000 2010

1 Guinea 5 1 Nigeria 6

Burkina Faso

10 1 Chad 10 1 Cameroon 13 2

Central African Republic

Zimbabwe

15 17 7

Benin 20

1 Djibouti 20

Sierra Leone

Ghana

28 2

Senegal

Ethiopia

29 33 0

Uganda 33

Namibia

34 7

Guinea-Bissau 36

1 D. R. Congo 38

Togo

38 1 Niger 43 1 Burundi 45 0

Madagascar

Kenya

46 47 15

Gambia 49

1 Zambia 50 4

Rwanda 56 23

Sao Tome and Principe 56

Malawi

United Republic of Tanzania

57 64 27

Mali 70

44â&#x20AC;&#x192; |â&#x20AC;&#x192; The Millennium Development Goals Report 2011

One of the most effective ways to prevent malaria is to sleep under an insecticide-treated net, since mosquitoes carrying the malaria parasite mostly bite at night. Regular use of mosquito nets can reduce deaths in children under five. The past 10 years have seen a remarkable surge in the production, purchase and distribution of insecticidetreated mosquito nets globally, particularly in Africa. Data from household surveys indicate a marked increase in both net ownership and use among children. Between 2008 and 2010, 290 million nets were distributed in sub-Saharan Africa, enough to cover 76 per cent of the 765 million people at risk in 2010. Most African countries with data for 2009-2010 show increased mosquito net coverage and reduced disparities among various population groupsâ&#x20AC;&#x201D;largely due to nationwide campaigns for the distribution of free nets that emphasize poor, rural areas. Rural and urban children in Africa are now equally likely to sleep under an insecticide-treated mosquito net.

More African children are receiving the recommended medicines for malaria, but accurate diagnosis remains critical Prompt diagnosis and treatment are needed to prevent life-threatening complications from malaria. However, accurate diagnosis is critical. The majority of childhood fevers, for example, are not due to malaria, and should not be treated with antimalarial drugs. In 2010, WHO declared that everyone with suspected malaria has a right to a diagnostic test before treatment, rather than presumptive treatment based on clinical symptoms, such as fever. As a consequence, an indicator that tracks the proportion of febrile children receiving antimalarial medicines does not reflect current treatment policy guidance and should be interpreted with caution. Household surveys indicate that, during 20082010, 38 per cent of febrile children in sub-Saharan Africa received antimalarial drugs, which may be an underestimate of appropriate treatment of malaria if suspected cases were actually confirmed through diagnostic testing. However, it may also reflect patients receiving antimalarial medicines who do not, in fact, have the disease. The recommended treatment for uncomplicated malaria in nearly all African countries is artemisininbased combination therapy. In five African countries with trend data on drug types, a greater proportion of feverish children receiving antimalarial drugs are using this first-line treatment.

Goal 6: Combat HIV/AIDS, malaria and other diseasesâ&#x20AC;&#x192; |â&#x20AC;&#x192;45

The incidence of tuberculosis is falling, bringing the MDG target within sight Number of new tuberculosis cases per 100,000 population (incidence) (including people who are HIV-positive), 1990-2009 Sub-Saharan Africa

Oceania

South-Eastern Asia

400

300

200

100

0 1990 1993 1996 1999 2002 2005 2008

Southern Asia

0 1990 1993 1996 1999 2002 2005 2008

Caucasus & Central Asia

Eastern Asia

250

200

150

100

0 1990 1993 1996 1999 2002 2005 2008

250

Latin America & the Caribbean

0 1990 1993 1996 1999 2002 2005 2008

Northern Africa

Western Asia

250

200

150

100

0 1990 1993 1996 1999 2002 2005 2008

Developing regions

0 1990 1993 1996 1999 2002 2005 2008

World

250

200

150

100

Range of estimates

0 1990 1993 1996 1999 2002 2005 2008

Incidence trends Note: The scale used for the sub-Saharan Africa, South-Eastern Asia and Oceania regions is different from the scale used for the rest of the regions due to the higher tuberculosis incidence levels in the former three regions.

46 | The Millennium Development Goals Report 2011

The burden of tuberculosis is gradually easing. Globally, the incidence rate peaked at 142 cases per 100,000 people in 2004. Since then, it has fallen by about 1 per cent a year, reaching 137 cases per 100,000 people in 2009. This corresponds to an estimated 9.4 million people (range, 8.9 million–9.9 million)3 newly diagnosed with the disease worldwide in 2009, the same number as in 2008. If these trends continue, the world is on track to achieve the goal of halting and reversing the incidence of tuberculosis. In 2009, most new cases of tuberculosis were reported in Asia (55 per cent) and Africa (30 per cent). The five countries with the largest numbers of cases were India, China, South Africa, Nigeria and Indonesia. China and India combined accounted for 35 per cent of the world’s new tuberculosis cases. An estimated 12 per cent of people newly diagnosed with the disease in 2009 were HIV-positive, and sub-Saharan Africa accounted for approximately 80 per cent of those cases.

Tuberculosis prevalence and mortality are also declining Number of tuberculosis deaths per 100,000 population (excluding people who are HIV-positive), 1990 and 2009 Sub-Saharan Africa 32 53 South-Eastern Asia 52 31 Southern Asia 47 26 Oceania 53 20 Caucasus & Central Asia 23 20 Eastern Asia 37 12

All tuberculosis-related figures are the midpoint in a range. The complete data series of ranges and corresponding midpoints are available at http://mdgs.un.org.

Western Asia 8 5 Latin America & the Caribbean 13 3 Northern Africa 7 2 Developed regions 8 4 Developing regions 37 23 0

10 1990

2009

Mortality rates from tuberculosis are dropping in all regions. Worldwide, deaths attributed to the disease have fallen by more than one third since 1990. In 2009, tuberculosis caused an estimated 1.3 million deaths among those who were not infected with HIV. An additional 0.4 million deaths from tuberculosis were recorded among people who were HIV-positive. The total of 1.7 million deaths is equivalent to 26 deaths per 100,000 people. Current projections suggest that the Stop TB Partnership target of halving 1990 death rates by 2015 could be achieved at the global level and in a number of regions. Several regions have already halved their 1990 mortality rate from tuberculosis.

Goal 6: Combat HIV/AIDS, malaria and other diseases | 47

Tuberculosis prevalence is also falling in most regions. An estimated 14 million people were living with the disease in 2009—the equivalent of 200 cases per 100,000 people. However, trends remain uncertain.

Only Western Asia appears to be on track to achieve the Stop TB Partnership target of halving 1990 prevalence rates by 2015.

Up to 6 million lives have been saved since 1995, thanks to an effective international strategy for the diagnosis and treatment of tuberculosis Progress against tuberculosis today is the result of intensive efforts over the past 15 years to implement the “DOTS” strategy (1995-2005) and its successor, the Stop TB Strategy (launched in 2006). Between 1995 and 2009, a total of 41 million tuberculosis patients were successfully treated according to the DOTS/Stop TB Strategy and up to 6 million lives were saved as a result. In 2009, it was reported that 5.8 million people worldwide had been officially diagnosed with tuberculosis. This represents about 63 per cent of the estimated number of all cases. Among patients that were notified of their diagnosis in 2008, 86 per cent were successfully treated—exceeding the 85 per cent target of successful treatment of new positive cases. Despite these positive outcomes, and related interventions such as antiretroviral therapy, much

more remains to be done. In approximately one third of new cases, the recommended strategy is not being used. Moreover, about 90 per cent of patients with multidrug-resistant tuberculosis are not being diagnosed and treated according to international guidelines. Many people with tuberculosis who are also HIV-positive do not know their HIV status, and are not yet accessing antiretroviral therapy. Funding gaps remain large, despite increased resources over the past decade and substantial financing in many countries from the Global Fund to Fight AIDS, Tuberculosis and Malaria. In the next five years, intensified efforts are needed to plan, finance and implement the range of interventions and approaches included in the Stop TB Strategy, according to the targets established in the Global Plan to Stop TB, 2011-2015.

48 | The Millennium Development Goals Report 2011

Goal 7 Ensure environmental sustainability

Target Integrate the principles of sustainable development into country policies and programmes and reverse the loss of environmental resources

Forests are disappearing rapidly in South America and Africa, while Asia — led by China — registers net gains Net change in forested area between 1990 and 2000 and between 2000 and 2010 (Million hectares per year) 3.0

Africa

Asia

2.0

Europe

North & Central America

Oceania

South America

2.2

1.0 0.9 0.0

0.7

0.0 -0.3

-0.6

-0.04

-0.7

-1.0

-2.0

-3.0

-4.0

-3.4 -4.1

-4.2

-4.0

-5.0 Net gain 1990-2000

Net loss 2000-2010

1990-2000

2000-2010

Note: The composition of regions is different from the rest of the report. In this chart, Oceania corresponds to what in the MDG regions is Oceania and Australia combined; Europe in the MDG regions is part of the developed regions; and North & Central America are included under developed regions and Latin America, respectively.

Although still alarmingly high, the rate of deforestation and loss of forest from natural causes is slowing down. At the global level, it decreased from an estimated 16 million hectares per year in the 1990s to about 13 million hectares per year in the past decade. At the same time, afforestation and the natural expansion of forests in some countries and regions have reduced the net loss of forest area significantly at the global level. The net change in forest area over the period 2000-2010 is estimated at -5.2 million hectares per year, down from -8.3 million hectares per year in the period 1990-2000. However, most of the forest loss is still occurring in countries in the tropics, while the net gain is mostly found in countries in the temperate and boreal zones.

Goal 7: Ensure environmental sustainability | 49

South America and Africa saw the largest net losses of forest areas between 2000 and 2010. Oceania also reported a net loss, largely due to severe drought and forest fires in Australia over the past decade. Asia, on the other hand, registered a net gain of some 2.2 million hectares annually in the past 10 years, mostly because of large-scale afforestation programmes in China, India and Viet Nam. Rapid conversion of forested lands to other uses continued in many other countries in the region. The rich biodiversity of the world’s forests remains imperilled by the still high rate of global deforestation and forest degradation as well as a decline in primary forests. One positive trend, however, is growth in the establishment of protected areas, which increased by 94 million hectares since 1990 and now cover an estimated 13 per cent of the world’s forests. Forests play an important role in the global carbon cycle. Trees absorb carbon from the atmosphere and store it in their wood, but the carbon is released back into the atmosphere when the wood is burned or decomposes. It is estimated that the forestry sector alone is responsible for one sixth of all humaninduced greenhouse gas emissions—mainly due to deforestation. In late 2010, countries agreed to establish a mechanism under the United Nations Framework Convention on Climate Change to reward developing countries that reduce carbon emissions from deforestation and forest degradation—through the so-called REDD+ mechanism. So far, more than $4 billion has been pledged for early action. In addition, the United Nations General Assembly designated 2011 as the International Year of Forests to raise awareness of sustainable management, conservation and development of all types of forests. “Forests for People” is the theme for the Year, highlighting the dynamic relationship between forests and the people who depend on them.

Despite the downturn in economic activity, global greenhouse gas emissions continue their ascent Emissions of carbon dioxide (CO²), 1990 and 2008 (Billions of metric tons) Eastern Asia 3.0 7.7 Southern Asia 1.0 2.5 Latin America & the Caribbean 1.0 1.7 Western Asia 0.6 1.3 South-Eastern Asia 0.4 1.2 Southern Asia (excluding India) 0.3 0.8 Sub-Saharan Africa 0.5 0.7 Eastern Asia (excluding China) 0.5 0.6 Caucasus & Central Asia 0.5* 0.5 Northern Africa 0.2 0.5 Oceania <0.1 <0.1 Developing regions 6.8 16.0 Developed regions 15.0 13.9 World

21.8 30.1

5 1990

2008

* Data for Caucasus & Central Asia refer to 1992.

In 2008, the latest year for which data are available, global carbon dioxide (CO2) emissions continued to rise, reaching 30.1 billion metric tons, an increase of 1.7 per cent from the previous year. This change was smaller than in the period 2006-2007 (2.9 per cent) due to the economic crisis, which resulted in a decrease in emissions in 2008 in several countries,

50 | The Millennium Development Goals Report 2011

in particular in developed regions. Still, emissions overall increased, underscoring the urgent need for strengthened global action against climate change. According to the World Meteorological Organization, which issues annual updates on the status of climate change and greenhouse gas emissions, the decade 2001-2010 was the warmest on record since 1880 in terms of average global temperatures. It was warmer than the previous record decade 1991-2000. The 2008 emissions were 38 per cent above the 1990 level. Per capita emissions remain highest in the developed regions—11.2 metric tons of CO2 per person per year in 2008, compared to about 2.9 metric tons in the developing regions and 0.8 metric tons in subSaharan Africa, the lowest regional value. The gap in CO2 emissions per capita between developed and developing regions has diminished somewhat since 1990: In 1990, 12.3 metric tons of CO2 were emitted per person per year in developed regions, compared to about 1.7 metric tons in the developing regions and 0.9 metric tons in sub-Saharan Africa. Emissions per unit of economic output fell by more than 36 per cent in the developed regions and by about 9 per cent in the developing regions. The 2008 values for this indicator were significantly higher for developing than for developed regions: 0.58 versus 0.38 kilograms of CO2, respectively, per dollar of economic output. The December 2010 United Nations Climate Change Conference in Cancún, Mexico, was an important step forward in international negotiations under the UN Framework Convention on Climate Change. At the conference, a set of decisions known as the “Cancun Agreements” were adopted by the international community to address collectively and comprehensively the long-term challenge of climate change. However, many of these decisions need to be elaborated upon to drive national actions to mitigate greenhouse gas emissions. Operationalizing these decisions will be the subject of further negotiations, which are expected to take place at the next major climate change conference in Durban, South Africa, in December 2011.

The Montreal Protocol is not only helping to restore the ozone layer, but to curb climate change Consumption of all ozone-depleting substances (ODSs), 1986-2009 (Thousands of tonnes of ozone depleting potential) 1,400

Developed regions

1,200

Developing regions

1,000

Caucasus, Central Asia, Eastern & South-Eastern Europe

800 600 400 200 0 1986

1990

1994

1998

2002

2006 2009

The Montreal Protocol is an undisputed—but still unfinished—success story. Much more work remains to be done to ensure the protection of the ozone layer for this and future generations. Still, what the parties to the Protocol have managed to accomplish since 1987 is unprecedented, providing an example of what international cooperation at its best can achieve. As of end-2009, the consumption of 98 per cent of all ozone-depleting substances controlled under the Montreal Protocol had been phased out. Global observations have verified that atmospheric concentrations of such substances are declining. With full implementation of the Protocol’s provisions, the ozone layer is expected to return to its pre-1980 levels around the middle of this century. The Protocol has also delivered substantial climate benefits, since ozone-depleting substances are also global-warming gases. The reduction in such substances between 1990, when they reached peak levels, and 2000 has yielded a net reduction of about 25 billion tonnes equivalent of CO2-weighted globalwarming gasses.

Goal 7: Ensure environmental sustainability | 51

Target Reduce biodiversity loss, achieving, by 2010, a significant reduction in the rate of loss

Added effort and innovative approaches are needed to meet new targets for the conservation of priority ecosystems

managed by indigenous and community groups. By 2020, under the new targets, at least 17 per cent of land and inland water areas, and 10 per cent of coastal and marine areas, are to be conserved, including more priority sites for conservation. An expansion of sites will only deliver benefits for biodiversity, however, if they are well managed and supported.

The global tide of extinctions continues unabated IUCN Red List Index of species survival* (showing the proportion of species expected to remain extant in the near future in the absence of additional conservation action) for mammals (1996-2008), birds (1988-2008), amphibians (1986-2004) and aggregate index (1986-2008)

Proportion of terrestrial areas protected and proportion of coastal waters (up to 12 nautical miles) protected, 1990-2010 (Percentage) 14 12

0.95

0.90

8 6

0.85

4 2

0.80

0 1990

1994

Developed regions

1998

2002

2006

2010

Developing regions

Land

Sea

The extent of ecosystems worldwide designated as protected areas has increased dramatically over the last half century. In 2010, over 150,000 protected sites covered 12.7 per cent of the world’s land area and 7.2 per cent of its coastal waters (extending out to 12 nautical miles). Beyond this, marine protection is still very limited. Only 3.5 per cent of exclusive economic zones (up to 200 nautical miles) and less than 1.5 per cent of the total ocean area are designated as marine protected areas. Despite the overall increase in protected ecosystems, biodiversity is still in decline, owing to inadequate management of existing sites and gaps in the protection of areas deemed priorities for conservation. Two global networks have been formed for the protection of such sites: Important Bird Areas (11,000 sites of importance for avian conservation) and Alliance for Zero Extinction sites (588 areas supporting the only remaining populations of one or more highly threatened species). However, only 26 per cent and 22 per cent of these critical sites, respectively, are fully protected. New targets adopted in 2010 by the 193 parties to the Convention on Biological Diversity called for the expansion of the global protected area network. Targeted sites include ecological corridors and areas

0.75 0.70

1986

1990

1994

1998

Aggregate index

Birds

Mammals

Amphibians

2002

2008

* A Red List Index value of 1.0 means that the species in question is of least concern since it is not expected to go extinct in the near future. A Red List Index value of zero indicates that species has gone extinct.

To measure trends in the percentage of species threatened with extinction, the International Union for Conservation of Nature and its partners have compiled what is known as the Red List Index, now available for all the world’s birds (10,000 species), mammals (4,500 species) and amphibians (5,700 species). The latest indices show that, overall, species are declining in population and range and are moving towards extinction—with consequences for the ecosystem services upon which all people depend. An aggregated index shows the average trends across these three groups. Amphibians are most threatened, and are declining most rapidly, but all groups with known trends show a deterioration in status. Other classes of organisms not yet indexed are likely to mirror this pattern, with some being even more threatened (such as cycads—a palm-like tropical plant) and others disappearing even more quickly (such as corals).

52 | The Millennium Development Goals Report 2011

Global marine resources continue to decline

The global production of marine capture fisheries reached a peak of 86.3 million tonnes in 1996. Since that time, it has declined slightly, to 79.5 million tonnes in 2008, with large fluctuations between years. The proportion of fish stocks estimated to be underexploited or moderately exploited declined from 40 per cent in the mid-1970s to 15 per cent in 2008. Over roughly the same period, the proportion of overexploited, depleted or recovering fish stocks increased from 10 per cent to 33 per cent. The proportion of fully exploited stocks has remained relatively stable at about 50 per cent since the 1970s, with some slightly lower levels between 1985 and 1997.

Status of the exploited fish stocks, 1974-2008 (Percentage) 100

In spite of action on the part of coastal States, and good progress in some cases, the overall decline in global fisheries continues. The most serious pressures on fisheries resources remain overfishing, pollution and loss of habitats. Policy and management actions to safeguard these resources must focus on countering the overcapacity of fishing fleets and the integration of plans to rebuild marine resources with national political and economic decision-making.

0 1974

1979

1984

1989

1994

1999

2004 2008

Overexploited + Depleted + Recovering Fully exploited Underexploited + Moderately exploited

The limits for sustainable water resources have already been exceeded in Western Asia and Northern Africa Surface water and groundwater withdrawal as a percentage of internal renewable water resources, taking into consideration official treaties between countries, around 2005 Western Asia

166

Northern Africa

Southern Asia

Caucasus & Central Asia

Eastern Asia

South-Eastern Asia Sub-Saharan Africa

Water resources are still abundant Water scarcity is approaching

8 3

Latin America & the Caribbean

Sustainable limits have been exceeded

Oceania <0.1 Developed regions

10 0

The proportion of water resources used by a country is a complex indicator reflecting development, national water policies, and physical and economic water scarcity. At low levels of development, it is generally advantageous to increase total water withdrawal. But beyond a certain “inflection point”, ecosystems will be strained and competing water uses will not allow all users to receive their fair share. Dry years may exacerbate the problem, which makes identifying the exact inflection point difficult, as do years of abovenormal precipitation.

100

110

120

130

140 150 160 170 180

Most regions withdraw less than 25 per cent of their renewable water resources. Considering usage trends since 1960, they will not approach the range of physical water scarcity for some time. Two regions, however, Western Asia and Northern Africa, have far exceeded the threshold of 75 per cent, meaning that their water resources are no longer sustainable. Two other regions are approaching the threshold of 60 per cent.

Goal 7: Ensure environmental sustainabilityâ&#x20AC;&#x192; |â&#x20AC;&#x192;53

Target Halve, by 2015, the proportion of the population without sustainable access to safe drinking water and basic sanitation

The world is likely to surpass the drinking water target, though more than 1 in 10 people may still be without access in 2015 Proportion of population using different sources of water, 1990 and 2008 (Percentage) 100 13

40 50

28 80

7 9

16 28

28 35

14 60

53 55

64 54 83

44 56

82 58

49 39

33 22

84 72

0 1990 2008 1990 2008 1990 2008 1990 2008 1990 2008 1990 2008 1990 2008 1990 2008 1990 2008 1990 2008 Oceania

Sub-Saharan South-Eastern Southern Africa Asia Asia

Piped water on premises

Caucasus & Central Asia

Other improved sources

Eastern Asia

Western Asia

Unimproved sources

Northern Latin America Developing Africa & the Caribbean regions

54 | The Millennium Development Goals Report 2011

Progress to improve access to clean drinking water has been strong. Globally, coverage increased from 77 per cent in 1990 to 87 per cent in 2008. If this trend continues, the MDG drinking water target of 89 per cent coverage will be met—and likely surpassed—by 2015.

cent in 1990, to 86 per cent in 2008. Sub-Saharan Africa nearly doubled the number of people using an improved drinking water source—from 252 million in 1990 to 492 million in 2008. Coverage in that region increased from 49 per cent in 1990 to 60 per cent in 2008.

In 92 per cent of developing countries (103 out of 112 countries), drinking water coverage increased between 1990 and 2008 or stayed the same, at a rate of 98 per cent or higher. In only 13 countries did coverage decline.

In all regions, coverage in rural areas lags behind that of cities and towns. In 2008, an estimated 141 million urbanites and 743 million rural dwellers continued to rely on unimproved sources for their daily drinking water needs. In sub-Saharan Africa, an urban dweller is 1.8 times more likely to use an improved drinking water source than a person living in a rural area.

Latin America and the Caribbean, Eastern Asia and South-Eastern Asia have already met the MDG drinking water target. Eastern Asia registered the largest increase in drinking water coverage—from 69 per

Poor, rural populations remain at a disadvantage in accessing clean drinking water Proportion of population using different sources of water by wealth quintile, rural and urban areas, sub-Saharan Africa, 2004/2009 (Percentage) Urban areas

Rural areas

100

20 80

35 32

100

53 60

62 64

40 60

39 26

16 0

5 Poorest 20%

0 Second 20%

Piped on premises

Middle 20%

Fourth 20%

Richest 20%

Other improved sources

An analysis of survey data from sub-Saharan African countries shows that the poorest 20 per cent of the population in urban areas are almost six times more likely to rely on an unimproved drinking water source than the richest 20 per cent. In urban areas,

Poorest 20%

Second 20%

Middle 20%

2 Fourth 20%

9 Richest 20%

Unimproved sources

the poorest households are 12 times less likely than the richest households to enjoy the convenience and associated health benefits of having a piped drinking water supply on premises.

Goal 7: Ensure environmental sustainabilityâ&#x20AC;&#x192; |â&#x20AC;&#x192;55

Over 2.6 billion people still lack flush toilets and other forms of improved sanitation

17 per cent in 2008. Almost two thirds of the people who practise open sanitation reside in Southern Asia.

Proportion of population using an improved sanitation facility, 1990 and 2008 (Percentage) Sub-Saharan Africa 28 31

The International Year of Sanitation in 2008 gave much needed impetus to the debate on sanitation. And in various regions, yearly sanitation conferences are held to ensure that sanitation remains on the political agenda and receives the attention it deserves.

Southern Asia 25 36

Oceania 55 53

Gaps in sanitation coverage between urban and rural areas are narrowing

Eastern Asia 43 56

Northern Africa is the only region that has already surpassed the MDG sanitation target, increasing coverage from 72 per cent in 1990 to 89 per cent in 2008.

South-Eastern Asia

Urban/rural ratio of the proportion of population using an improved sanitation facility, 1990 and 2008

46 69

Southern Asia

Latin America & the Caribbean

4.3

69 80

2.2

Latin America & the Caribbean 2.1 1.6

Western Asia 79 85

Sub-Saharan Africa

Northern Africa

2.0

72 89

1.8

Caucasus & Central Asia

South-Eastern Asia 91

1.9 95

Developing regions

Oceania

42 53

1.8 1.8

World

Western Asia

54 61 0

20 1990

40 2008

1.3

1.8

77 80

1.4 100

Northern Africa 1.7

2015

1.1 Eastern Asia

The world is far from meeting the sanitation target. In fact, at the current rate of progress, it will take until 2049 to provide 77 per cent of the global population with flush toilets and other forms of improved sanitation. Almost half the population of developing regions and some 2.6 billion people globally were not using an improved form of sanitation in 2008. That year, an estimated 1.1 billion people did not use any facility at all and practised open defecation, which poses enormous health risks, particularly for poorer segments of the population who are most exposed to the dangers of inadequate human waste disposal. Globally, open defecation rates have declined by one third, from 25 per cent of the population in 1990 to

1.4 1.2 Caucasus & Central Asia 1.1 1.0 Developing regions 2.2 1.7 Developed regions 1.1 1.1 0.0

1.0 Equal

2.0

3.0

4.0 Rural populations at a disadvantage

1990

2008

5.0

56â&#x20AC;&#x192; |â&#x20AC;&#x192; The Millennium Development Goals Report 2011

Asia, where an urban resident is 2.2 times more likely to use an improved facility than a rural resident. Still, this represents significant improvement since 1990, when an urban resident was 4.3 times more likely to use an improved sanitation facility than a person living in a rural area.

Rural populations everywhere are disadvantaged when it comes to improved sanitation, though disparities with urban areas are decreasing in all regions. Globally, an urban resident is 1.7 times more likely to use an improved sanitation facility than someone living in a rural area. Inequalities are most stark in Southern

Improved sanitation has failed to reach the poorest households in parts of Southern Asia Proportion of population by sanitation practices and wealth quintile, Southern Asia, 1995 and 2008 (Percentage) 100

6 1

Unimproved Improved

80 56 74

1995

2008

45 36

7 0

Open defecation

4 2

1995

2008

Poorest 20%

8 1995

2008

Second 20%

1995

2008

Middle 20%

An analysis of trends over the period 1995-2008 for three countries in Southern Asia shows that improvements in sanitation have disproportionately benefited the wealthy. Sanitation coverage for the poorest 40 per cent of households has hardly

1995

2008

Fourth 20%

Richest 20%

increased, and four out of five people in the bottom two quintiles continue to practise open defecation. The most progress was made by those in the fourth wealthiest quintile, while the richest 20 per cent of the population has maintained its very high coverage level.

Goal 7: Ensure environmental sustainabilityâ&#x20AC;&#x192; |â&#x20AC;&#x192;57

39 per cent to 33 per cent. More than 200 million of these people gained access to either improved water, sanitation or durable and less crowded housing. However, in absolute terms, the number of slum dwellers continues to grow, due in part to the fast pace of urbanization. The number of urban residents living in slum conditions is now estimated at some 828 million, compared to 657 million in 1990 and 767 million in 2000.

Target By 2020, to have achieved a significant improvement in the lives of at least 100 million slum dwellers

Growing urbanization is outpacing slum improvements, calling for new and realistic national and local targets Population living in slums and proportion of urban population living in slums, developing regions, 1990-2010 Population in slums (Millions)

Proportion of urban population in slums (Percentage) 60

900 800 700

46.1 42.8

600

39.3 35.7

34.3

500

40 32.7 30

400

300 200

100 0

1990

In 2010, the highest prevalence of slum conditions was found in sub-Saharan Africa. There, 62 per cent of the urban population were sheltered in slums, followed by Southern Asia (35 per cent) and South-Eastern Asia (31 per cent). Particularly critical is the situation in conflict-affected countries, where the proportion of urban populations living in slums increased from 64 per cent in 1990 to 77 per cent in 2010.

1995

2000

Percentage of urban population living in slums

2005

2007

2010

Population in slums

From 2000 to 2010, the share of urban residents in the developing world living in slums declined from

Redoubled efforts will be needed to improve the lives of the urban poor in cities and metropolises across the developing world. Towards that end, in April 2011, the Governing Council of the United Nations Human Settlements Programme encouraged countries to enumerate their slum populations, and to set realistic national, regional and local targets for improving the lives of slum dwellers. These could extend beyond the current MDG target, which has a deadline of 2020. Priorities include housing and basic services, infrastructure such as water and sanitation facilities, transport, energy, health and education. Countries are also urged to promote access to affordable land with secure tenure and to create the conditions in which people are able to carve out and sustain a livelihood.

58 | The Millennium Development Goals Report 2011

Goal 8 Develop a global partnership for development

Aid to developing countries is at a record high, but falls short of promises made in 2005 Official development assistance (ODA) from developed countries, 2000-2010 (Billions of constant 2009 US$ and current US$) 140 120

100

20 0 2000

2002

2004

2006

2008

2010

(Preliminary)

Net debt forgiveness grants Humanitarian aid Multilateral ODA Bilateral development projects, programmes and technical cooperation Total net ODA in billions of current US$

In 2010, net aid disbursements amounted to $128.7 billion, equivalent to 0.32 per cent of developed countries’ combined national income. This was the highest level of real aid ever recorded and an increase of 6.5 per cent in real terms over 2009. If debt relief and humanitarian aid are excluded, bilateral aid for development programmes and projects rose by 5.9 per cent in real terms, as donors continued to scale up their core development projects and programmes. Most of the rise was in new lending (which grew by 13.2 per cent), but grants also increased (by 6.8 per cent). In 2005, at the Gleneagles Group of Eight (G8) Summit and other forums, donors committed to increase their assistance to developing countries. The pledges they made at these meetings, combined with other commitments, implied a lifting of aid from about $80 billion in 2004 to nearly $130 billion in 2010 (at constant 2004 prices). However, when comparing the 2010 outcome with pledges made in 2005, there was a shortfall of $19 billion. A little over $1 billion of this shortfall can be attributed to lower-than-expected levels of gross national income due to the economic crisis. However, the remaining gap—$18 billion—was due to the failure of donors to meet their commitments. Overall, the combined effect of the increases has lifted aid by 37 per cent in real terms since 2004, or about $30 billion (in 2004 dollars).

Goal 8: Develop a global partnership for development | 59

At the Gleneagles summit, G8 donors also envisaged that their commitments, combined with those of other donors, would raise official development assistance (ODA) to Africa by $25 billion in 2010. That year, bilateral aid to the continent as a whole was $29.3 billion, of which $26.5 billion was for sub-Saharan Africa. These amounts represent increases of 3.6 per cent and 6.4 per cent in real terms, respectively, over 2009. Preliminary estimates show that Africa will receive only about $11 billion out of the $25 billion increase promised at Gleneagles, due mainly to the underperformance of some European donors that give large shares of their aid to Africa.

Target Address the special needs of the least developed countries, landlocked countries and small island developing states

ODA outlook: Expect leaner years ahead Net official development assistance from OECD-DAC countries as a proportion of donors’ gross national income to all developing countries and to the least developed countries (LDCs), 1990-2010 (Percentage) 0.40

Total ODA

0.35

ODA to LDCs

0.30 0.25 0.20 0.15 0.10 0.05 0.00 1990

1994

1998

2002

2006

2010

(Preliminary)

In 2010, Denmark, Luxembourg, the Netherlands, Norway and Sweden continued to exceed the United Nations target for ODA of 0.7 per cent of their gross national income (GNI). The largest donors by volume were the United States, followed by the United Kingdom, France, Germany and Japan. The largest increases in ODA in real terms between 2009 and 2010 were made by Australia, Belgium, Canada, Japan, Portugal, the Republic of Korea and the United Kingdom. In 2005, the 15 European Union countries that are members of the Development Assistance Committee of the Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Development (OECD-DAC) committed to allocate a minimum of 0.51 per cent of their GNI to ODA by 2010. The following countries surpassed that goal: Luxembourg (1.09 per cent), Sweden (0.97 per cent), Denmark (0.90 per cent), the Netherlands (0.81 per cent), Belgium (0.64 per cent), the United Kingdom (0.56 per cent), Finland (0.55 per cent) and Ireland (0.53 per cent). France nearly met the goal with an ODA/GNI ratio of 0.50 per cent, while others fell short by a larger margin: Spain (0.43 per cent), Germany (0.38 per cent), Austria (0.32 per cent), Portugal (0.29 per cent), Greece (0.17 per cent) and Italy (0.15 per cent). Other DAC member countries, including Australia, Canada, Norway, Switzerland and the United States,

60 | The Millennium Development Goals Report 2011

also made promises for 2010 that they kept. In 2005, Japan committed to providing an additional $10 billion in aid over the period 2004 to 2009. It fell short by $3.6 billion due to severe economic constraints; however, in 2010 its ODA again rose significantly. New Zealand plans to achieve an ODA level of $NZ 600 million ($472 million) by 2012-2013 and appears to be on track. The Republic of Korea was not a DAC donor in 2005 and made no promises to increase its aid. Still, since 2005, its aid programme has increased in real terms by 56 per cent. Looking ahead, a recent OECD survey shows that most donors plan to increase aid over the coming three years, though at a sharply reduced pace. Aid will grow at 2 per cent a year between 2011 and 2013, compared to an average of 8 per cent a year over the past three years. Aid to Africa is expected to rise by just 1 per cent a year in real terms, compared to the average of 13 per cent over the past three years. In 2008-2009, out of an average total of $82.1 billion in ODA that was allocable by sector, $23.1 billion focused on support for gender equality and women’s empowerment. Aid concentrates increasingly on the poorest countries, with the least developed countries (LDCs) receiving about a third of donors’ total aid flows.

Target Develop further an open, rule-based, predictable, non-discriminatory trading and financial system

Protectionism was averted, despite troubling economic times, due to strong international cooperation Proportion of developed country imports from developing countries and from the LDCs admitted free of duty, all duty-free access and preferential duty-free access,* 1996-2009 (Percentage) 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 1996

1998

2000

2002

2004

2006

2009

Total duty-free access, all developing countries Total duty-free access, LDCs Preferential duty-free access, all developing countries Preferential duty-free access, LDCs * Preferential duty-free access is calculated by subtracting from the total duty-free access all products receiving duty free treatment under the most-favoured-nation treatment (MFN) regime.

Despite fears of renewed protectionism at the beginning of the economic crisis in 2008, the strong international governance that emerged from the Group of Twenty (G20) Summit and other multilateral initiatives averted a return to restrictive trade practices. The preferential market access granted to the LDCs and developing countries remained relatively unchanged from the levels of the previous five years. The vast majority of exports from developing countries are now imported free from custom duties in developed country markets. Recent years have seen a slight increase in the proportion of duty-free imports from developing countries other than LDCs, with the proportions for the two groups converging at about 80 per cent of their exports. The preferential nature of the duty-free access granted by developed countries is very different between LDCs and developing countries more generally. Thanks to

Goal 8: Develop a global partnership for development | 61

the general reduction of tariffs in developed markets, more and more products are now routinely imported duty free under the World Trade Organization’s mostfavoured-nation (MFN) treatment. Products that are MFN duty free include not only raw materials but also manufactures, such as electronics equipment under the Information Technology Agreement. This has benefited many of the more advanced developing countries. When MFN treatment is excluded, only 19 per cent of exports by developing to developed countries benefited from “true” preferential treatment.

On the other hand, true preferential duty-free treatment remains the dominant mode through which LDCs gain access to the markets of developed countries. The proportion of LDC exports benefiting from such preferences has been increasing over the years, reaching 53 per cent in 2009. All but one of the developed countries have granted duty-free market access to at least 97 per cent of products originating from LDCs. The exception is the United States, which has tariffs on imports of textile and clothing from Asian LDCs.

Tariffs on agricultural products from developing countries continue to fall, but remain unchanged for clothing and textiles Developed countries' average tariffs on imports of key products from developing countries, 1996-2009 (Percentage)

Developed countries' average tariffs on imports of key products from LDCs, 1996-2009 (Percentage)

Agricultural goods Clothing Textiles

0 1996

1998

2000

2002

2004

2006

2009

In 2009, applied tariffs on agricultural products from developing countries and LDCs continued to fall slowly, while remaining largely unchanged for textiles and clothing. During a period dominated by the global economic crisis, no major tariff initiatives were undertaken. Rather, specific modifications, such as those by the European Union relating to rice and sugar, served to advance progress. Since 2005, the decline in preferential tariffs has tended to follow the trend observed for most-favourednation treatment. As a result, preference margins, measured as the difference between MFN treatment

Agricultural goods Clothing Textiles

0 1996

1998

2000

2002

2004

2006

2009

and the best tariff for all developing countries, have seen only marginal changes in the past five years. However, thanks to the special preference granted to them, the margin of preference for LDCs is higher than that for other developing countries. Nevertheless, these preferences are declining as tariffs in developed economies diminish. As a result, the LDCs have been turning their attention to large emerging economies, where demand is increasing and MFN tariffs remain high (about 10 per cent for raw materials and 18 per cent for processed products). Other developing countries now absorb half the exports of LDCs.

62 | The Millennium Development Goals Report 2011

A country’s external debt burden affects its creditworthiness and vulnerability to economic shocks. Better debt management, the expansion of trade and, particularly for the poorest countries, substantial debt relief have reduced the burden of debt service. Between 2000 and 2008, the average ratio of public debt service to exports for developing regions declined from 12.5 per cent to 3.4 per cent. In 2009, due to the global economic crisis, export earnings of developing countries declined by 21 per cent, while total public debt service remained at about the same level as in 2008. As a consequence, the ratio of public debt service to exports increased for all developing regions except Southern Asia, Western Asia and Oceania, with the overall average rising to 3.6 per cent. The impact was most pronounced for the small island developing States (SIDS) and the LDCs.

Target Deal comprehensively with developing countries’ debt

A sharp drop in exports in 2009 interrupted the downward trend of developing countries’ debt service ratios External debt service payments as a proportion of export revenues, 2000, 2008 and 2009 (Percentage) Western Asia 16.2 9.2 9.0 Latin America & the Caribbean 21.8 6.8 7.2

Forty countries are eligible for debt relief under the Heavily Indebted Poor Countries (HIPC) initiative. Of these, 36 countries have reached the “decision point” stage in the process and have had future debt payments reduced by $59 billion (in end-2009 net present value terms); 32 countries that subsequently reached their “completion point” have received additional assistance of $30 billion (in end-2009 net present value terms). The debt burdens of countries included in the HIPC initiative are below the average for all LDCs.

Northern Africa 15.3 6.1 6.9 South-Eastern Asia 6.5 3.0 4.0 Southern Asia 13.7 5.2 3.5 Sub-Saharan Africa 9.4 2.0 3.1 Oceania 5.9 2.8 1.9 Caucasus & Central Asia 8.4 0.6 1.0 Eastern Asia 5.1 0.6 0.6 Developing regions 12.5 3.4 3.6 Small island developing States 8.7 7.6 9.5 Least developed countries 11.4 2.9 5.6 0

5 2000

10 2008

15 2009

Goal 8: Develop a global partnership for development | 63

68 per cent by end-2010. Mobile cellular networks are offering alternative communications opportunities to previously unconnected regions. In the LDCs, for example, mobile cellular penetration is around 30 per cent, compared to only 1 per cent fixed telephone line penetration.

Target In cooperation with the private sector, make available the benefits of new technologies, especially information and communications

The world is increasingly interconnected through mobile, high-speed communications Number of fixed telephone lines and mobile cellular subscriptions per 100 inhabitants, 1995-2010

Mobile communications are not only connecting remote and rural populations to basic voice services. They are also offering innovative applications in, for example, the areas of business, health and education, which can contribute to the achievement of other MDGs.

Two thirds of the world’s population have yet to gain access to the Internet

120 100

Number of Internet users per 100 inhabitants, 1995-2010 80

80 70

60 40

Least developed countries Developing regions Developed regions

0 1995

30 1997

1999

2001

2003

2005

2007

2010*

Mobile cellular telephone subscriptions, developed regions Fixed telephone lines, developed regions Mobile cellular telephone subscriptions, developing regions Fixed telephone lines, developing regions

20 10 0 1995

1999

2003

2007

2010*

* Data for 2010 are estimates.

By the end of 2010, 90 per cent of the world’s inhabitants were covered by a mobile cellular signal. The number of mobile cellular subscriptions had grown to an estimated 5.3 billion—including nearly 1 billion subscriptions to 3G (third generation) services—and more than 2 billion people worldwide were using the Internet, increasingly through broadband access. Growing demand for information and communications services, combined with technological advances, growing infrastructure and falling prices, are allowing more and more people across the globe to join the information society. By the end of 2010, mobile cellular penetration levels had reached an estimated 76 per cent, and almost one in three people were online. Many developed countries are reaching saturation levels in mobile cellular subscriptions, with an average penetration level of 116 per cent. Growth in mobile telephony continues to be strong in the developing world, where mobile penetration had reached around

The number of Internet users continues to expand. However, penetration levels in the developing world remain relatively low, at 21 per cent by end-2010, compared to 72 per cent in the developed regions. Globally, two out of three people are not using the Internet. And in LDCs, Internet penetration was as low as 3 per cent by end-2010. In absolute numbers, the developed regions have been surpassed by the developing world, which in 2010 accounted for 60 per cent of Internet users worldwide, up from 40 per cent in 2005.

64â&#x20AC;&#x192; |â&#x20AC;&#x192; The Millennium Development Goals Report 2011

High-speed Internet connections, now more widely available, have promising applications for development

By the end of 2010, fixed broadband penetration in the developed regions averaged 24.6 per cent, compared to only 4.4 per cent in the developing world. And fixed broadband subscriptions in the developing world are heavily concentrated in a few countries. In the majority of LDCs, the number of fixed broadband subscriptions remains very low and services are prohibitively expensive.

Fixed broadband subscriptions and mobile broadband subscriptions per 100 inhabitants, 2000-2010 60 Mobile broadband, developed regions 50

Mobile broadband, developing regions Fixed broadband, developed regions

Fixed broadband, developing regions

30 20 10 0 2000

2002

2004

2006

2008

networks. More countries are introducing national broadband plans to bring more people online, but major differences in broadband access persist.

2010*

Mobile broadband has started to become a true alternative to fixed broadband access. In 2010, 143 countries were offering mobile broadband services commercially, compared to less than 50 in 2005. Demand is expected to grow rapidly over the next few years, especially in the developing world and in such regions as Africa, where fixed-line infrastructure to the end-user is limited.

* Data for 2010 are estimates.

Some of the most promising applications and services in information and communications for development are those that are delivered over high-speed broadband

Two thirds of mobile broadband subscriptions are still in the developed regions, where, in 2010, penetration levels had surpassed the 50 per cent mark.

Goal 8: Develop a global partnership for developmentâ&#x20AC;&#x192; |â&#x20AC;&#x192;65

66 | The Millennium Development Goals Report 2011

A note to the reader Measuring progress towards the MDGs Progress towards the eight Millennium Development Goals is measured through 21 targets and 60 official indicators.1 This report presents an accounting to date of how far the world has come in meeting the goals using data available as of June 2011.2 Most of the MDG targets have a deadline of 2015, using 1990 as the baseline against which progress is gauged. Country data are aggregated at the subregional and regional levels to show overall advances over time. Although the aggregate figures are a convenient way to track progress, the situation of individual countries within a given region may vary significantly from regional averages. Data for individual countries, along with the composition of all regions and subregions, are available at http://mdgs.un.org.

The basis for this analysis Regional and subregional figures presented in this report are compiled by members of the United Nations Inter-Agency and Expert Group on MDG Indicators (IAEG). In general, the figures are weighted averages of country data, using the population of reference as a weight. For each indicator, individual agencies were designated as official providers of data and as leaders in developing methodologies for data collection and analysis (see inside front cover for a list of contributing organizations). Data are typically drawn from official statistics provided by governments to the international agencies responsible for the indicator. To fill data gaps, data for many of the indicators are supplemented by or derived exclusively from data collected through surveys sponsored and carried out by international agencies. These include many of the health indicators, which are compiled, for the most part, from Multiple Indicator Cluster Surveys (MICS) and Demographic and Health Surveys (DHS). In some cases, countries may have more recent data that have not yet become available to the relevant specialized agency. In other cases, countries do not produce the data required to compile the indicator, and the responsible international agencies estimate the missing values. Even when national data are available, adjustments are often needed to ensure international comparability. Data from international sources, therefore, often differ from those available within countries. The United Nations Statistics Division maintains the official website of the IAEG and its database (http://mdgs.un.org). In an effort to improve transparency, the country data series in the database are given colour codes to indicate whether the figures are estimated or provided by national agencies; they 1

The complete list of goals, targets and indicators is available at http://mdgs.un.org. Given the time lag between collecting data and analysing them, few indicators can be compiled for the current year. Most of them are based on data from earlier years—generally up to 2009 or 2010.

are also accompanied by metadata with a detailed description of how the indicators are produced and the methodologies used for regional aggregations.

Reconciling national and international data Reliable, timely and internationally comparable data on the MDG indicators are crucial for holding the international community to account. They are also important in encouraging public support and funding for development, allocating aid effectively, and comparing progress among regions and across countries. Discrepancies among sources and gaps in national data have raised concerns in the statistical community and troubled country data producers who find themselves dealing with different figures for the same indicator. A number of initiatives have been launched to reconcile national and international monitoring and to resolve differences in methods and definitions used by various agencies within countries and in international agencies. The IAEG has promoted a dialogue between national and international agencies to improve the coherence of national and international data and to ensure the quality and transparency of methodologies and data produced. The IAEG has also provided training to national statistics experts in more than 60 countries. As a result, data production in countries is increasingly aligned with internationally agreed-upon recommendations and standards. Moreover, international agencies have developed a better understanding of countries’ data availability and of how to work with national experts to produce and estimate indicators.

Improving monitoring systems Improved data and monitoring tools are crucial for devising appropriate policies and interventions needed to achieve the MDGs. Although some progress is being made, reliable statistics for monitoring development remain inadequate in many poor countries, and the challenge of building in-country capacity to produce better policy-relevant data is enormous. Building such capacity demands increased and well-coordinated financial and technical support from development partners. It also requires country ownership and government commitment to spur the institutional changes needed to ensure the sustainability of capacity-building efforts. As a results of recent efforts, more data are now available in the international series for the assessment of trends for all MDGs. In 2010, 119 countries had data for at least two points in time for 16 to 22 indicators; in contrast, only four countries had this data coverage in 2003. These advances are the result of increased national capacity to venture into new data collection initiatives as well as to increase the frequency of data collection. For instance, the number of countries with two or more data points on contraceptive prevalence increased from 50 in the period 1986-1994 to 103 in 2010. At the same time, the number of countries with no data on this indicator decreased from 106 to 34.

Regional groupings | 67

Regional groupings

Developed regions Caucasus & Central Asia Northern Africa Sub-Saharan Africa South-Eastern Asia Oceania Eastern Asia Southern Asia Western Asia Latin America & the Caribbean

This report presents data on progress towards the Millennium Development Goals for the world as a whole and for various country groupings. These are classified as “developing” regions and the “developed” regions.* The developing regions are further broken down into the subregions shown on the map above. These regional groupings are based on United Nations geographical divisions, with some modifications necessary to create, to the extent possible, groups of countries for which a meaningful analysis can be carried out. A complete list of countries included in each region and subregion is available at mdgs.un.org. The designations employed and the presentation of the material in the present publication do not imply the expression of any opinion whatsoever on the part of the Secretariat of the United Nations concerning the legal status of any country, territory, city or area of its authorities, or concerning the delimitation of its frontiers or boundaries. * Since there is no established convention for the designation of “developed” and “developing” countries or areas in the United Nations system, this distinction is made for the purposes of statistical analysis only.

For more information visit the UN Statistics Division Millennium Development Goals website at http://mdgs.un.org Visit the UN Millennium Development Goals website at www.un.org/millenniumgoals Visit the UN Millennium Campaign Office website at www.endpoverty2015.org

PHOTO CREDITS Cover:

Page 7:

Page 9:

Page 10: © Id No. 443349/UN Photo Page 11: © Tran Thi Hoa/World Bank Page 12: © Martine Perret/UN Photo Page 14: © Kibae Park/UN Photo Page 16: © Tom Pietrasik/NYHQ2009-2174/UNICEF Page 20: © Olivier Chassot/UN Photo Page 24: © Sara Duerto Valero/UNDESA Page 28: © Isaac/NYHQ2008-0845/UNICEF Page 30: © Shehzad Noorani/NYHQ2006-0088/UNICEF Page 32: © Olivier Asselin/NYHQ2010-1030/UNICEF Page 34: © Masaru Goto/World Bank Page 36: © Isaac/NYHQ2008-0852/UNICEF Page 39: © Nesbitt/NYHQ2010-0875/UNICEF Page 43: © Masaru Goto/World Bank Page 44: © Arne Hoel/World Bank Page 47: © Nesbitt/NYHQ2010-0849/UNICEF Page 48: © Jonathan Ernst/World Bank Page 53: © Curt Carnemark/World Bank Page 57: © Sara Duerto Valero/UNDESA Page 58: © Charlotte Kesl/World Bank Page 59: © Sara Duerto Valero/UNDESA Page 65: © Jonathan Ernst/World Bank

| 5

2 | The Millennium Development Goals: Report 2010

“Between now and 2015, we must make sure that promises made become promises kept. The consequences of doing otherwise are profound: death, illness and despair, needless suffering, lost opportunities for millions upon millions of people.” — UN Secretary-General Ban Ki-moon

USD 15 ISBN 978-92-1-101244-6

Printed at the United Nations, New York 11-31339—June 2011—31 000 Sales No. E.11.I.10

Green Economy: A Transformation to Address Multiple Crises An Interagency Statement of the United Nations System The current financial and economic crisis is throwing millions of people into poverty, especially the most vulnerable in the developing world. This is happening amidst the ongoing food, water, energy, ecosystem, and climate crises. Together, these crises are undermining the efforts to achieve the Millennium Development Goals and setting back development progress of the past few decades. The financial and economic crisis requires a collective response from the international community. Leading economies should continue and further strengthen the coordination of their stimulus programmes to revive global economic growth. Apart from addressing urgent needs in such areas as social safety nets, health, and education, programmes should lay a solid foundation for shared growth and sustainable development. Furthermore, the international community should ensure that developing countries have not only the fiscal space to launch their own stimulus programmes but also access to international markets for a rapid resumption of trade. Central to the new economic foundation are new growth poles that can potentially contribute to economic recovery, decent job creation, and reduced threats of food, water, energy, ecosystem and climate crises, which have disproportionate impacts on the poor. Investing stimulus funds in such sectors as energy efficient technologies, renewable energy, public transport, sustainable agriculture, environmentally friendly tourism, and the sustainable management of natural resources including ecosystems and biodiversity, reflects the conviction that a green economy can create dynamic new industries, quality jobs, and income growth while mitigating and adapting to climate change and arresting biodiversity decline. Such investments should be scaled up significantly in all countries and be supported by national and international policy instruments and incentives such as updating building codes and enforcement of internationally agreed environmentally friendly shipping regulations. It is also essential to have green investments at the community level to reduce vulnerability and strengthen resilience. Major events such as the climate negotiations in Copenhagen in December 2009 and the 2010 High Level Meeting of the United Nations General Assembly on Biodiversity are opportunities for urging the expansion of green investments.

To be able to scale up such investments, many developing countries will require financial support. It is imperative, therefore, that the worldâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s leaders resolve to deliver on commitments, including those made by G8 and G20 leaders, to support developing countries, especially the most vulnerable, in coping with the effects of the current crisis. This includes augmented balance-of-payments support, trade finance, lending by the multilateral banks, and concessional finance for the poorest countries. Fiscal reforms can shift the burden of taxation from jobs, income and savings to the overuse of resources, resource depletion and environmental degradation, thereby encouraging green investments. Carbon pricing can advance these aims. There is also a need for phasing out perverse subsidies that encourage excessive use of fossil fuel based production inputs in agriculture and fishing sectors. Both carbon pricing and the reform of perverse subsidies, however, must be accompanied by measures to protect the access by the poor to food security and energy. The revenues saved by phasing out such subsidies could be reallocated towards the development of green job skills, the provision of clean, affordable energy alternatives for the poor, and support to other green sectors with broad economic benefits. Trade needs to be revived and trade policies need to support both development and the transfer of environmentally sound technologies. These include technologies to make clean energy affordable to developing countries as well as to support climate change mitigation and adaptation including ecosystem-based adaptation. It is important to avoid any measures that could result in new protectionism, including measures in stimulus packages. Early conclusion of the Doha Round trade negotiations can facilitate a green recovery, in particular the negotiations on environmental goods and services, fisheries subsidies, and reforming agriculture rules that would be conducive to fostering food security for all. The Aid for Trade mandate should be fulfilled. Reliable finance should be provided to small and medium-sized enterprises for investment in green businesses. The shift towards a green economy requires education for sustainable development including training in new job skills and newly required health systems. All stakeholders must double efforts to provide training on a range of skills for decent and remunerative jobs protected by adequate health care. A particular focus should be given to the poor, vulnerable groups including women, youth, and to small and medium sized enterprises and farms. These green jobs training programmes can be integrated into both formal and informal education schemes. Similarly, green jobs related health issues should be taken into account by formal health systems. These efforts will assist developing countries in leapfrogging to a greener and inclusive economic development path. Skill transfer and the sharing of experience in labour health protection is an area ripe for international â&#x20AC;&#x201C; both NorthSouth, South-South, and triangular - cooperation. Capacity of national and local governments should be strengthened to facilitate the transfer of knowledge and technology, including by exploring and using intellectual property related mechanisms for the benefit of developing countries. The various parts of the United Nations System through the United Nations Development Group should coordinate their efforts to formulate guidance to UN Country Teams on mainstreaming green economic principles into the United Nations Development Assistance Framework and the Regional Coordination Mechanism. National development agencies could be encouraged to do the same. Significant additional financial and technical assistance should be mobilised to support the efforts of Member States to shift their economies towards a green path. To be efficient and coherent, an integrated approach should be adopted when pursuing a green economy. Green investments in transport, renewable energy, tourism and long-term investment in agriculture, for example, should aim to generate environmental and health co-benefits and to expand agriculture and food production. To ensure that short-term emergency actions do not undermine the longer-term sustainability of interventions, stimulus plans should avoid lock-in to business-as-usual patterns of consumption and production. In addition, a sound monitoring and accounting system is essential. There is a need for a rapid standardization and operationalisation of the System of Environmental-Economic Accounting and additional systems that adequately capture the social and environmental dimensions of economic transformations. The solidarity of the international community is being tested. Let this economic recovery be the turning point for an ambitious and effective international response to the multiple crises facing humanity. The most representative test case is when governments meet to seal the deal on climate change in Copenhagen in December 2009. Let Copenhagen be the turning point for ushering in a global green economy.

The Basel Convention on the Control of Transboundary Movements of Hazardous Wastes and their Disposal (BASEL CONVENTION) Convention on Biological Diversity (CBD) The Convention on International Trade in Endangered Species of Wild Fauna and Flora (CITES) Food and Agriculture Organization of the United Nations (FAO) International Labour Organization (ILO) International Maritime Organization (IMO) United Nations Conference on Trade and Development (UNCTAD) United Nations Development Programme (UNDP) United Nations Environment Programme (UNEP) United Nations Educational, Scientific and Cultural Organization (UNESCO) United Nations Economic Commission for Europe (UNECE) United Nations Economic Commission for Latin America and the Caribbean (UNECLAC) United Nations Economic and Social Commission for Asia and the Pacific (ESCAP) Economic and Social Commission for Western Asia (ESCWA) United Nations Framework Convention on Climate Change (UNFCCC) United Nations Human Settlements Programme (UN-HABITAT) United Nations Industrial Development Organization (UNIDO) World Bank Group World Intellectual Property Organization (WIPO) World Meteorological Organization (WMO) World Trade Organization (WTO) United Nations World Tourism Organization (UNWTO)